Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 6104 - Contract - David Wood Construction Inc.- Fire Administration Complex - 11_12_1998
Resolution No. 6104 Item. No. 48 November 12, 1998 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for the Fire Administration Complex, by and between the City of Lubbock and David Wood Construction, Inc., of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 12th day of Novembe . 1998. VW -MY SI ON, MAYOR AT ST: Kaythi 0arnell, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: V690- Victor Kilmark Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney gs✓ccdocs/David Wood Const.res November 3, 1998 1. r CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX BID #98212 fir CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ITB #98212, Addendum #4 ADDENDUM #4 ITB #98212 FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: October 9,1998 CLOSE DATE: October 14,1998 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please see the attached Addendum #4 from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us ;TK YOU Phuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 98212ad4.doc rr PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS 4 4010 AVENUE R, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 (806) 747-0168 ■ FAX (806) 747-7146 ADDENDUM NO. 4, 9 October 1998 r' RE: City of Lubbock Fire Department Complex Bid #98212 TO: Prospective Bidders This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 08131 /98 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of 3 page(s) and the attached Supplemental Drawing No's. SD-33 thru SD-40. I. CHANGES TO PREVIOUS AMENDMENTS i A. Addendum #2 1. In paragraph VLOO Sheet M5, add 'SD-22" to the end of the sentence. 2. Supplemental Drawing SD-26: Add note '5" Sound Attenuation Batts @ 6" Walls - 3%- Sound Attenuation Batts @ 3 5/8' Walls. B. Addendum #3: Under 'TO: Prospective Bidders" revise the second paragraph to read as follows: 'This Addendum consists of 4 pages, and the .attached Supplemental Drawing No's. SD-28 thru SD-32.' II. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Paragraph 2.1.D.3: Delete '[" and "I' from mitered and delete '[square butted)' in its entierty. B. Section 08700 - HARDWARE 1. Paragraph 3.3 a. FIRE TRAINING/ADMINISTRATION/FIRE MARSHALL'S OFFICE/FIRE STATION #2 I— (1) Heading #6: Delete 'A05A" and 'Al 4". (2) Heading #7 (a) Delete 'A27". (b) Add 'B39". C (3) Heading #8: Delete 'A22A'. (4) Heading #22: Revise '09A' to 'DO9A". b. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE r" (1) Heading #1: Delete '13". i C. Section 10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS r., 1 1. Paragraph 2.2 03860396/98 Page 1 of 4 F Addendum #4 r a. Paragraph A: Delete 'continuous hinged". b. Paragraph A.3: Delete paragraph in its entirety. C. Paragraph B.2: Revise '16" to read "18". d. Paragraph B.4: Revise paragrapg to read as follows: "4. Trim: Manufacturer's standard wrap -around metal trim.' e. Paragraph B.5: Revise to read as follows: "5. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard painted steel." f. Paragraph G: Revise "White enameled" to read "Clear anodized aluminum'. 2. Paragraph 2.3.C: revise '3/8" to read "nominal 1 /8" 3. Paragraph H: Revise 'I_I inch wide x I_]" to read 'minimum 32 inch wide x 80". D. Section 09960 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1. Paragraph 2.2: Add paragraph 'E" to read as follows: 'E. Acrylic Emulsion: High -build water based coating 1. Percentage of Solids by Volume: 44, minimum." 2. Paragraph 3.5.B: Add the following paragraph: "Exterior CMU Back of parapets 180 (8-10) 180 (4-8)" where inidcated on drawings Ill. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS A. Sheet A5 1. In the "REMARKS' under the door schedule FOOTNOTES, add M5 to read as follows: "M5 GALVANIZED STEEL DOOR AND FRAME" 2. TRAINING TOWER - DOOR SCHEDULE a. Under the "REMARKS" column, add "M5" for all marks scheduled. B. Sheet A9 1. Revise North Elevation — Maintenance Building 7/A9 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-42 to show correct location of louvers. C. Sheet A10 1. Revise Wall Section 5/A10 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-33. 2. Wall Section 6/A10 a. Change Detail key 19/A10 to 19A/A10 OH as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD- 34. 3. Wall Section 8/A10 a. Change Detail key 19/A10 to 19A/A10 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-34. b. Revise Detail 19/A10 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-34. D. Sheet All 1 1. Wall Section 9/A11 a. Note 5" high CMU starter course. 2. Wall Section 10/A11' a. Note 5" high CMU starter course. 3. Wall Section 7/Al2 03860396/98 Page 2 of 4 i Addendum #4 r a. Note chairs shown in elevation as "NIC`. E. Sheet Al 1. Wall Section 1/Al2 ,.. a. Change Note "Modified Bitumen Roof" to "Membrane Roofing" 2. Wall Section 2/Al2 a. Change Note "Modified Bitumen Roof" to "Membrane Roofing" F. Sheet A13 1. Wall Section 12/A13 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0. b. Change Eave Height to 108'-0" '1 u�e11 Ser a 1 3/A 1 3— a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0. 3. Wall Section 151A13 a. Extend 8" CMU to Deck. Revise Wall Section 16/A13 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-36. G. Sheet A14 Revise Wall Section 1/A14 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-37. H. Sheet Al 1. Change Guardrail elevation to 3'-6". Typical all guardrails. 1. Sheet A16 1. Revise Detail 9/A16 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-35. J. Sheet Al 1. Revise Reflected Ceiling Plan in Dormitory A112 and Officer's Quarters A113 as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-38. K. Sheet A18 1. Chase walls between Men's Toilet B116 and Women's Toilet 8113 to be full height to bottom of roof deck with sound insulation in one side of partition. L. Sheet A21 1. ENLARGED PLAN KEYED NOTES: Revise note no's. #20 and #21 to read as follows: "20 FIXED LECTURE TABLE" 021 FIXED LECTURE TABLE" M. Sheet E1 1. OFFICERS' QUARTERS A113: Delete one light fixture 'A' located in the Northwest corner of the room. N. Sheet E2 1. LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE a. Fixture "P": In the "NOTES" column, add "18" b. Fixture "P1 ": In the "NOTES" column, add "18" C. Fixture "HH": In the "NOTES" column, add "17" 2. LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES a. Add note "17" to read as follows: "17 PROVIDE FIXTURE WITH SOLID FACE IN LIEU OF PERFORATED FACE." r— t 03860396/98 Page 3 of 4 r Addendum #4 . r b. Add note "I B" to read as follows: '17 AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, PROVIDE 14 KIM MODEL NO. 2B/AR4/400SMH480/DB-P/FUSED WITH DS240-50OV300-DB POLE. PROVIDE CONCRETE BASE FOR EACH POLE AS INDICATED ON SHEET E16. POLE LOCATIONS TO BE SIMILAR TO LOCATIONS INDICATED ON SHEET MPE1. EXACT LOCATION TO BE PROVIDED BY ARCHITECT." END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 03860396/98 Page 4 of 4 Addendum #4 r f - PARKHILL, SMIT14 & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS 4010 AVENUE R, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 ` (806) 747-0168 ■ FAX (806) 747-7146 ADDENDUM NO. 2, 2 October 1998 RE: City of Lubbock Fire Department Complex Bid #98212 TO: Prospective Bidders This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the origin( Bidding Documents dated 08/31 /98 as noted below. Acknowledge reoeipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. This AddendLwn consists of 24 page(s) , the attached revised drawing no's. C2 thru C4, Supplemental Drawing No's. SDA thru SD-27, revised Bid Submittal and specification sections 07150 - DAMPPROOFING and 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS. I. CHANGES TO GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS: A. In paragraph 5, change '365 (THREE HUNDRED SIXTY FIVE)' to '450 (FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY)'. II. CHANGES TO BID SUBMITTAL A. Replace with attached BID SUBMITTAL. Ill. CHANGES TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT A. Article 42: Add the following sentence to the end of the first paragraph: 'Payment will not be made under any circumstances for materials not stored off site .' IV. CHANGES TO INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS A. Replace paragraph 1.3.A with the following: 'A. Bidders are expected to examine the Geotechnical Data and Property Survey and then determine for themselves the validity of the information contained there -in as it relates to this project.' B. Replace paragraph 1.3.A with the following: r 'B. Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations of subsurface soil conditions and property survey information or recommendations made in the Geotechnical report.' 03860396/98 Page 1 of 24 Addendum #2 r r rR V. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS: A. Section 01019 -CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 1. In paragraph 1.5.A, revise "[three]" to read "four". B. Section 02466 - DRILLED PIERS 1. Replace paragraph 1.2.13.1 with the following: r "1. Section 01019 -Contract Considerations: Unit prices. C. Section 02513 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 1. Paragraph 1.1.A: Revise to read as follows: "A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - Genral Requirements apply to work of this Section." 2. Paragraph 1.3.D: Add paragraph "D" to read as follows: "D. Section 01019 -Contract Considerations: Alternates." 3. Paragraph 2.1.E.1: Revise "Materials, (1), (1) (a)" to read "Materials, (1) (a)". ,». 4. Paragraph 2.2.A: Revise "(Type C and D)" to read "(Type D)". 5. Paragraph 3.3.C.2: Revise paragraph to read as follows: 02. Place to 1 34 inch thickness at all Base Bid areas and 2 inch thickness at all asphaltic concrete paved areas indicated in Alternate Bid #1." D. Section 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING r1. Paragraph 1.3.D: Add paragraph "D" to read as follows: "D. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Altemates." E. Section 02665 - WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 1. Paragraph 1.3: Add paragraph "D" to read as follows: "C. Section 01019 -Contract Considerations: Alternates." 2. Paragraph 2.1: Add paragraphs "J" and "K" to read as follows: "J. Backflow Preventers: Doulbe check valve backflow prevention assembly complying with AWWA C510. K. Pre -cast Concrete Vaults: Dalworth model 408-1; 4 foot x 8 foot x depth required by existing water line, with integral 3 x 5 foot access hatch." 3. Paragraph 3.8: Add paragraph "H" to read as follows: "H. Vault: Provide pre -cast concrete vault at each doulbe check valve backflow prevention assembly. Set vault plumb, level and maximum 2 inches above adjacent grade." F. Section 02521 - CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 1. Paragraph 1.3.D: Add paragraph "D" to read as follows: "D. Section 01019 -Contract Considerations: Alternates." 2. Paragraph 2.2.E.1: Delete the first sentence in its entirety. 03860396/98 Page 2 of 24 Addendum #2 r r G. Section 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1. Paragraph 2.3.C.4.b: Delete paragraph in its entirety. 2. Paragraph 2.3.F.2: Add "Minimum 1 hp." in front of "Electric". r H. Section 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1. Paragraph 2.4: Add note H as follows: r "Floor Hardener: Floor hardener shall be a colorless aqueous solution containing zinc silicofluoride, magnesium silicofluoride, or sodium silicofluoride. These silicofluorides can be used individually or in combination." 2. Paragraph 3.11: Add note C as follows: "Floor Hardener: Floor hardener shall be applied after the concrete has been cured and then air dried for 14 days. Three coats shall be applied, each the day after the preceding coat was applied. For the first application, 1 pound of the silocofluoride shall be dissolved for each gallon of water. Floor should be mopped with clear water shortly after the preceding application has dried to remove encrusted salts. Proprietary hardeners shall be applied in I" accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. During application, area should be well ventilated. Precautions shall be taken when applying silicofluorides due to the toxicity of the salts. Any compound that contacts glass or aluminum should be immediately removed ,., with clear water." I. Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY 1. Paragraph 1.2: Add paragraph "G" as follows: "G. Pre -molded insulation inserts." 2. Paragraph 1.4: Add paragraph "GG" as follows: "GG. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation." 3. Paragraph 1.5.8.4: Add paragraph "4" as follows: "4. Provide data for premolded insulation inserts." 4. Paragraph 2.1: Add paragraph "F" as follows: "F. Insulation Inserts 1. W.R. Grace & Co." 5. Paragraph 2.2.D.3: a. Paragraph d: Revise to read as follows: "d. Type IV: - Single scored vertically, ground face. b. Add paragraphs "e" thru "g" to read as follows: "e. Type V - Ground face. f. Type VI - Molded concrete masonry units, standard gray. g. Type VII - Ground face." �. 6. Paragraph 2.12: Add paragraph "2.12" as follows: 4 "2.12 Insulation A. Premolded Inserts: 1 1 /4 inch thick premolded polystyrene conforming to ASTM C578, Type I, with a minimum density of 0.90 lbs. per cu. ft. and 03860396/98 Page 3 of 24 Addendum #2 r 1. GAS METER. ••-r �\ c •R 5905 G 2, 14 FIRE MARSHALL I O r ADMIN. (C) 13 0 VALVE V 1 ADDENDUM NO. 3 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS EXISTING 3- I.M. PRE LINE. VERIFY EXAC LOCATION AT JOB, G. COCK. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-7-1998 Psc Project ¢: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number. SD-31 7 ADDENDUM NO. 3 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS 1� SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-7-1998 PSC Project J: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-32 P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 a Fax (806) 775-2164 ITB #98212, Addendum #2 Office of Purchasing ADDENDUM #2 ITB #98212 FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX MAILED TO VENDOR: October 5,1998 CLOSE DATE: October 14, 1998 @ 2:00 PM The following Items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please see attached Addendum #2 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@maii.ci.lubbock.tx.us zYOU, Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID OF �iyl j l w.............................. GREGORY A. HORNE j ......................... '� 83489 r4 • -:;.• 13/A10 7/A16 TOP OF STUD = 117'-8" -� l I TOB ELEV VARIES 6/A16 SIM STEP ANGLE W ROOF SLOPE $ DECK ELEV VARIES EIFS ON 1 /2" GYP SHEATHING ON 3 5/8" MTL STUD FACE BRICK BATT INSUL STL ANGLES - REF SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING SD-12 1 /2" GYP SHEATHING 6" MTL STUD RIGID INSUL FILLER 1 SCHED CEILING 1 /2" sc WALL SECTION 5/Al 0 ADDENDUM NO. 4 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING ............... ............... ■ :��� ;;,■�_� Issue Date: 10-9-1998 2; Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & a?"li C �'�� Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD 8604.97 ::..:::..:.: LUBBOCK, TEXAS sheet Number: SD-33 ............... - 1 1 I t eb ■rrrr ■rrr■ ■rrr■ MENEM 12 1-3 5 8 C 19A/A10 REFER TO DETAIL 14/A10 FOR TYPICAL NOTES & ELEVATIONS. L3 1 /2x3 1 /2x1 /4x0'-6" ® 32" OC. EXP BOLT INTO BOND BEAM HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING 1 3/8" EIFS 1" EIFS @ 19A/A10 1/2" GYP SHEATHING 2 1 /2" MTL STUD 1 1 /2" SC DETAIL 19 A10 AS NOTED AT 19A/A10 ADDENDUM NO. 4 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-9-1998 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PsC project #: 03.8602, 8603 & Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD 8604.97 LUBBOCK, TEXAS Sheet Number: SD-34 INSULATION FILL CONTINUOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING ON RIGID INSUL ON STL DECK GUTTER & DOWNSPOUT TREATED 2x NAILER - ANCHOR W/ 3/8.0 M BOLTS TO ANGLE @ 32" OC COMPRESSIBLE FILLER PREFIN MTL TRIM DOWNSPOUT FACE BRICK 1/2" GYP SHEATHING 6" MTL STUD BATT INSUL 5/8" GWB 1 1 /2" sc DETAIL 9/ 16 ............... "' ADDENDUM NO. 4 ............... ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ..■■■■■■....... ■■ s :. `0 a �:.:: Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX all v 1 ':':: Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD t. 10 :HhooMssad: LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-9-1998 PSc Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-35 FIRE STOPPING STEEL DECK, REF STRUCT ELEV VARIES SEAL BLOCK JOIST PENETRATION W/ FIRE STOPPING 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" MTL STUDS SUSP ACOUS CLG 'ORAGE F = 99*-0" 1/2" sc WALL SECTION 16 /A13 ADDENDUM NO. 4 .................. .................. .................. .................. _1!; :me project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX :. _: S':.: 1: em Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD " '�' ' — LUBBOCK, TEXAS r SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-9-1998 PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number. SD-36 P 1 2" sc PARTIAL WALL SECTION - FIRE TRAINING TOWER 1 Al4 .OM: HHH: w� w' �..w,ww ■ ADDENDUM NO. 4 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-9-1998 PSc Project 0: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number. SD-37 rl 1 Z8" sc REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Qi DORMITORY A112 NORTH ADDENDUM NO. 4 ............... ............... ............... ............... Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX !I •. now a...■ soon ..... . soon■ Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD "'� I'm" " LUBBOCK, TEXAS =============== SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-9-1998 PSc Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-38 polli t I 1 1 /2" sc DETAIL NOTE: REVISE MILLWORK SECTION 2/A24 TO REFLECT SCRIBE ADDITION LG ATL STUD - BRACE CTURE ABOVE '0 WALL C - REF 2/A24 KEYED NOTES AS INDICATED BY:(2)----.- 1 SCORED CMU TYPE I 2 CMU TYPE VI 3 PREFINISHED METAL WALL PANELS 4 PREFINISHED METAL ROOF 5 STEEL PIPE BOLLARDS, REFER DETAIL 10/A1 6 PREFINISHED METAL GUTTER 7 PREFINISHED METAL DOWNSPOUT - REFER DETAIL 17/A10 8 COMPOSITION SHINGLES 9 STEEL PIPE GUARDRAIL, REFER DETAIL 18/A27 10 LOUVER, MOUNT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE 11 EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL 12 TRUCK EXHAUST FAN 9 1 /8" sc NORTH ELEVATION - MAINTENANCE BUILDING 7 /A9 r- i ft P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ITB #98212, Addendum #3 ADDENDUM #3 ITB #98212 FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: October 8,1998 CLOSE DATE: October 14,1998 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please see attached Addendum #3 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us P Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID r 98212ad3.doc r"7e w; PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER r" ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS 4010 AVENUE R, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 (806) 747-0168 0 FAX (806) 747-7146 ADDENDUM NO. 3, 6 October 1998 r RE: City of Lubbock Fire Department Complex Bid #98212 TO: Prospective Bidders This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 08/31/98 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of 4 page(s) , the attached revised drawing no's. C2 thru C4, Supplemental Drawing No's. SD-1 thru SD-27, revised Bid Submittal and specification sections 07150 - DAMPPROOFING, 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS, 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and 16770 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM. I. CHANGES TO PREVIOUS AMENDMENTS A. Addendum #2, paragraph III.A: Revise to read as follows: "Payment will not be made under any circumstances for materials stored off site .". a t II. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS .- A. Section 02521 - CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 1. Paragraph 2.2.C.1: In the ninth line, delete 2. Paragraph 2.2.C.2: In the third line, delete 3. Paragraph 2.4.A: In the second line, delete 4. Paragraph 3.1.A: In the last sentence, delete 5. Paragraph 3.2.C: Revise '?'"to read '1/2"". r� B. Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY 1. Paragraph 1.4: Add paragraph 'GG" to read as follows: 'GG. NCMA - TEK Manual.'. 2. Paragraph 1.5.13: Add paragraph '4" to read as follows: '3. If equivalent thickness method of determining fire resistance rating of CMU is used, submit calculations in conformance with NCMA TEK 7-1 indicating compliance.'. 3. Paragraph 1.6: Add paragraph 'B" to read as follows: "B. Fire -rated CMU: Provide fire rated units complying with UL 618 or units having an equivalent thickness in conformance with NCMA TEK 7-1.' r� R 03860396/98 Page 1 of Addendum #3 r� • 4. Paragraph 1.8.A: Change "4906" to read "U906". r 5. Paragraph 2.4 a. Paragraph B: Delete 'Pintle length as required to set in from face of veneer.' b. Paragraph D: Add the following sentence: "Pintle length as required to set in from face of veneer 3/4 to 1 inch." C. Paragraph E: Delete "3/4 to 1 inch." 6. Paragraph 3.7.A: Delete paragraph in its entirety. C. Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS r" 1. Paragraph 2.1: Revise paragraph "D' to "E" and add paragraph D to read as follows: "D. Encased Spring Assists: Precision Stair Corp.; Morristown, TN.' D. Section 07536 - MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 1. Paragraph 2.2.A: Change "75" to "55". E. Section 08700 - HARDWARE 1. Paragraph 3.3: In all headings reading "Threshold 170A' and "Threshold", revise to read "Threshold 270A'. F. Section 09960 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1. Paragraph 3.5.6: Under "2nd Coat' for Concrete Floor, change "283" to read "282" r' G. Section 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS 1. Replace section with attached section 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS. r� H. Section 16721 — Fire Alarm System 1. Fire alarm system and installation shall be bid as a separate line item to the electrical contractor. The fire alarm system shall not be priced together with the sound system. POO I. Section 16770 — Public Address Systems 1. Sound system package and installation shall be bid as a separate line item to the electrical contractor. The sound system shall not be priced together with the fire alarm system. Ill. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS A. Sheet A2 1. Floor Plan Keyed Notes a. Add Note 22 to read "Aluminum Handrail'. 2. Floor Plan a. In CORRIDOR B107, add section cut looking Northwest. Ref. Supplemental Drawing SD-29 for ELEVATION - CORRIDOR B107. b. In TRAINING SECRETARY B124, change borrowed lite reference from "BL5" to 130". C. In AUDITORIUM B129, add floor plan keyed note #22 at handrail on North & South walls. d. CONFERENCE ROOM C126: Change Key Note M to per. e. CONFERENCE D110: Change Key Note M to Spy. B. Sheet A3 1. BREAK/TRAINING 105: Change Key Note M to pS4. r"» C. Sheet A6 1. In the "PROJECTION SCREEN SCHEDULE" a. Mark PS1: Under "TYPE", revise to read "6' x 8' , ELECTRICALLY OPERATED. '•" b. Mark PS2: Under "TYPE', revise to read "7' x 9', ELECTRICALLY OPERATED. 03860396/98 Page 2 of Addendum #3 I"A • C. Under 'MARK", add "PS4" and under "TYPE" add "50" x 50", MANUALLY OPERATED". I d. Under "MARK", add "PS5" and under "TYPE" add "50" x 50", ELECTRICALLY OPERATED". 2. BORROWED LITE FRAME TYPE schedule: Add BL7, 3'-0" wide x 3'-8" high with glazing G9; Head section 15/A26; Jamb Section 15/A26 SIM. 3. See Supplemental Drawing SD-28, for Interior Elevation of East Wall of Auditorium B129. D. Sheet A15 1. Detail 9/A15: Change "ALUMINUM' to 'FLOOR PLATE" on all notations. E. Sheet A27 1. Detail 19/A27: Change 'ALUMINUM" to "FLOOR PLATE" on all notations. F. See Supplemental Drawing SD-29 for Interior Elevation of Corridor B107. G. Sheet MPE1 1. Relocate the three southeastern most Type "P" & "P1" light fixtures as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-30. 2. Relocate the weatherproof J-boxes serving gate keypad and pushbutton operators as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-31 and SD-32. 3. Circuit light fixture Type "DD" onto circuit HA-22. H. Sheet E1, Lighting Plan Administration Areas A & B 1. On the South side of Apparatus Bay 118, change the two Type "L1" fixtures to Type "L" and delete keyed note #8 at these fixtures. I. Sheet E2 1. Light Fixture Schedule: Add Acceptable Bidding Manufacturers are as follows: a. Columbia — Types A, Al, A2, A3, H, H 1, U, V, W, Z, Z 1, Z2, HH b. Prescolite — Types B, F, G, G1, G2, J, J1 N, X, X1, X2, GG C. Marissa — Type C d. Kenall — Types D, D1, R, R1 e. G.E. — Types K, K1, K2, K3, Y f. Greenlee — Types L, L1 g. Forum — Types M, M 1 h. Kim — Types S, FF i. Spaulding — Type P, DD j. Valmont — Type P1 k. Phoenix — Type Q I. Manning — Type T m. Carolina — Type AA n. Lightron — Types BB, BC, BD o. Moldcast — Type EE p. Alternate manufacturers listed for bidding shall meet or exceed the quality of the units specified. Listing in the addendum is only the right to bid the project and not acceptance as an equal. Submittal data will be reviewed for the complete equality of the substituted unit. 2. Change Types "DD' & "FF" to 277 volt. 3. Lighting Plan Administration Areas B & C a. At the main entry portico on the South side of Entry Lobby 101, change the two Type "L" fixtures to Type "L1" and add keyed note #5 at these fixtures. b. At the main entry portico on the North side of Entry Lobby 101, change the Type 'L" fixture to Type "L1' and add keyed note #5 at this fixture. 03860396/98 Page 3 of r Addendum #3 PM J. Lighting Plans - Maintenance 1. Over door no's. 15 and 15E, Delete the "Y" fixtures. 2. Over door no's. 15A, 156, 15C and 15D, Change the Type "Y" fixture to Type "L". K. Sheet E4 1. Circuit light fixture Type "DD" onto circuit HA-22. L. Sheet E6 1. In Conference Room C126 at the northwest wall provide a J-box above the ceiling (plan note #28) to serve motorized projection screen. Provide a switch box on the northwest wall for switch furnished by Projection Screen Manufacturer. Provide! all control wiring in %" C. as required from wall switch to screen motor. Connect screen for operation to circuit PC-41 with 2 #12 & #12 Gr. in %"C. M. Sheet E15 1. Change circuit breaker HA-22 in Panel "HA" to a 20A-1 P circuit breaker. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 03860396/98 Page 4 of Addendum #3 wa v� I N w z a tv� a � J CD Q V) 0 � a 1 GO t Q) I GO LLJ it Or ' W I CD t v tv) O v � > W J W rn O I t w ck: �* w z I � io 00 .0l_ ,7 .0 ,z ■••••••••■••••••• ADDENDUM NO. 3 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING .................. ................. ..............'.. Issue Date: 10-7-1998 I.o 1, 1In Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & IMI :� :::'_; s Project address EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD 8604.97 .11 .... ....• •` •• LUBBOCK, TEXAS sheet Number. SD-28 Boom LUBBOCK, -0. .................. poll r- 1 1 / 6"x16GA MTL STUD CONT-CLIP LEGS VERT STUDS 1 1 /2" sc DETAIL 1 LSD- 29 12'-0" 108'-11" FF = 99'-0" 1 /4" sc ELEVATION - CORRIDOR B107 SCHED CEILING 108'-11 " 1 1/2" OD HANDRAIL (EA SIDE OF CORRIDOR) HANDRAIL MOUNTING BRACKET - REFER DETAIL 1/SD-29 FF = 100'-0" ADDENDUM NO. 3 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10- 7-1998 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PSc Project J: 03.8602, 8603 & Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD 8604.97 LUBBOCK, TEXAS Sheet Number: SD-29 I 6 '\ ` 13 Itlf�l /I TRAIPIIIYG (S) C ©WP �LLUIJI P1 20 \ UPPLEMENTAL DRAWN -G - _ ADDENDUM N0. 3 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 10-7-1998 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PSc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD 8604.97 LUBBOCK, TEXAS Sheet Number: SD-30 r c a minimum 'R' value of 2.50. Form units to fit cores of masonry units." 7. Paragraph 2.4.A: Revise "3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross rods." to read "9 ga. Side rods with 9 ga. cross rods." �•+ 8. Paragraph 3.2: Add paragraph "E' as follows: 'E. Remove factory installed insulation inserts from all CMU cells indicated to be grouted prior to installing CMU.' 9. Paragraph 3.3: Add paragraph 'G" as follows: 'G. Preformed Insulation: Factory install preformed insulation in all cells of decorative CMU and CMU backup (except cells scheduled or indicated to be grouted) at all walls and portions of walls exposed to the exterior at the Administration Building and Maintenance Building.' 10. Paragraph 2.2.D.3: Add e. Type V - Ground Face J. Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1. Paragraph 2.2.8.2: Revise 'Types 1, II and III' to read "Types I and II". 2. Paragraph 2.4.C: Revise to read as follows: "C. Prepare and prime paint items specified or scheduled to be field painted in accordance with requirements specified in sections 09960 and 09900." K. Section 06410 -CUSTOM CASEWORK 1. Paragraph 2.2.N: Add the following paragraph: "2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A 166.9, Type B04071, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; anochrome satin finish." 2. Paragraph 2.2: Add the following paragraphs: "X. Shelf Brackets: BHMA A 156.9, Type B04112, formed steel brackets, anochrome satin finish, length as required by cabinet depth. Provide with manufacturer's standard padded rests at glass shelves. Y. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: 1. Conformance: BHMA A156.9 2. Style: B07051; Equal to K&V model P1092 ANOD." 3. Paragraph 2.4.D: Revise to read 'E.' and add paragraph "D." to read as follows: "D. Transparent Finish Casework a. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400A, flush overlay style, using the following materials: (1) Body Members (a) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak. (b) Semi -exposed: Medium density particleboard. (2) Stiles and Rails: Plain sawn red oak. (3) Shelves (a) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak. (b) Semi -exposed: Medium density particleboard. (4) Backs (a) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. (b) Semi -exposed: Tempered hardboard. (5) Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Alder. j� (6) Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard. i 03860396/98 Page 4 of 24 Addendum #2 G r- (7) Drawer Fronts: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. (8) Doors: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. (9) Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Red oak veneer banding." 4. Paragraph 3.2.H.2: Add "Transparent or" in front of "Opaque". L. Section 07181 -WATER REPELLENT COATING 1. Paragraph 1.2.A: Delete I" and "]" each side of [exterior masonry] and delete " , [stone], [and] [precast architectural concrete]'. M. Section 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 1. PARAGRAPH 1.7: Delete in its entirety and replace with the following: "1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 2. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. B. Performance Requirements 1. Insulation k Values a. k values indicated are based on 75 deg F (24 deg) C. b. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.' N. Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING 1. Paragraph 1.4: Add the following paragraph: "I. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems." 2. Paragraph 2.1.13: Delete paragraph in its entirety. 3. Paragraph 2.1.0 a. Renumber to "B". b. After "1479" add "and UL 2079". 0. Section 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES 1. Paragraph 11.11.13.11: Revise "Framing and Sheathing" to read "Rough Carpentry". P. Section 07410 - PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 1. Paragraph 1.1.A: Revise to read as follows: "A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - Genral Requirements apply to work of this Section.' 2. Paragraph 2.3.C.1.a: Delete "3/8 in. Wide (Small Batten)". 3. Paragraph 2.3.G: Delete paragraph 2.3.G in its entirety. 4. Paragraph 3.2.C.7: Revise "Type I" to read "Type II". 5. Paragraph 3.2.E: Delete pargraph 3.2.E in its entirety. 6. Paragraph 3.4.A.1: Revise "Maintenance Building' to read 'roof area over Entry Lobby D101 and portico roof areas at Fire Station #2 and outside Entry Lobby D101." 7. Paragraph 3.4.A.2: Revise "al other areas" to read "Maintenance Building". Q. Section 07533 - THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1. Paragraph 1.3.A: Revise "01039" to read '01019" 03860396/98 Page 5 of 24 1 Addendum #2 R. Section 07600 - SHEET METAL 1. Paragraph 1.2: Add paragraph "J" to read as follows: "J. Valley flashing at asphlat shingles." 2. Paragraph 1.3.13.1: Revise "Framing and Sheathing" to read "Rough Carpentry". 3. Paragraph 1.3: Add paragraph "P" to read as follows: "P. Section 07533 - THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING: Alternate roofing system." 4. Paragraph 1.4: Add paragraph "M' to read as follows: "M. ASTM D1187 - Asphlat-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.' 1 5. Paragraph 2.3.1): Revise "FS-TT-C-494" to read "ASTM D 1187". N S. Section 07724 - ROOF HATCH r" 1. Paragraph 1.3.A: Revise '06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing" to read "06112 - Rough Carpentry'. 2. Paragraph 1.3: Add paragraph 'E" to read as follows: i "E. Section 07533 - THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING: Alternate roofing system." 3. Paragraph 2.2.13: Delete "mm)". T. Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS 1. Paragraph 3.6.B.8: Revise "S-6" to read "S-5" and add ", color as selected by Architect to r match plastic laminate." U. Section 08211 - WOOD DOORS 1. Paragraph 2.2.C.1: Revise "rift cut" to read "plain sliced". t V. Section 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 064 1. Paragraph 1.4: Add paragraph 1.4.Q as follows: 4 "Q. AAMA 1503.1 - Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Sections." 2. Paragraph 1.6.G: Delete "[0.691' and revise "[0.451' to read "0.45". 3. Paragraph 2.1.13: Insert "Vistawall' infront of "Architectural". 4. Paragraph 2.1.11): Delete paragraph in its entirety. 5. Paragraph 2.3.1.3: Revise to read as follows: '3. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Hager, LCN, Pemko, Rockwood, Triangle Brass and Von Duprin. Components of other manufacuturers will be ' acceptable provided they comply with the standards specified in section 08700 - HARDWARE. 6. Add paragraph 2.3.1.4 to read as follows: "4. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this ( section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware ,r schedule for similar openings and the referenced code." z 03860396/98 Page 6 of 24 Addendum #2 w 7. Paragraph 3.7 a. Heading no. 1 (1) Revise the first line to read as follows: '1.5 pr Hinges 13131191 4.5 x 4" (2) Revise second line to read as follows: 01 Deadlatch 4722ANO5-602-628 4586 Lever x US27". (3) In the fifth line, revise 'US32P" to read 'US28". (4) In the last line, revise '170A" to read "270A". b. Heading no. 2 (1) Revise the first line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4" (2) In the last line of the schedule, revise "170A" to read "270A'. C. Heading no. 3 (1) Revise the second line of the heading to read as follows: 'Each Pair to Have' (2) Revise thefirst line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4" (3) Revise the third line of the schedule to read as follows: '2 Push/Pull Sets 11247 x US28 x Type 5 mounting at back to back push/pulls and Type 7 mounting at single ends.' d. Heading no. 4 (1) Revise the first line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4" (2) In the second line of the schedule, revise '35476" to read "3547L'. (3) In the sixth line of the schedule, revise '126CS' to read "1276CS'. (4) In the last line of the schedule, revise "170A" to read "270A". e. Heading no. 5 (1) Revise the first line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges 131311191 4.5 x 4" (2) In the second line of the schedule, revise "4532b" to read 'US28'. (3) In the third line of the schedule, revise '4532b" to read 'US28'. f. Heading no. 6 (1) Revise the first line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4" 03860396/98 Page 7 of 24 Addendum #2 (2) Revise the third line of the schedule to read as follows: Push/Pull Set 11247 x US28 x Type 5 mounting at back to back push/pulls and Type 7 mounting at single ends." g. Heading no. 7 (1) Revise the first line of the schedule to read as follows: "1.5 pr Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4" (2) In the second line of the schedule, revise '4532b" to read 'US28". W. Section 08700 - HARDWARE 1. Paragraph 3.3, FIRE TRAINING/ADM INISTRATION/FIRE MARSHALL'S OFFICE/FIRE STATION #2 a. Heading #2 (1) In the fifth line, revise "170A' to read "270A". b. Heading #4 (1) In the fifth line, revise '170A" to read "270A'. C. Heading #9 (1) In the fifth line, revise '170A" to read "270A". d. Heading #15 (1) In the fourth line, revise "170A' to read "270A". a. Heading #18 (1) In the fifth line, revise "170A" to read '270A". f. Heading #23 (1) In the sixth line, add "270A" after "Threshold". g. Heading #25: Add Heading to read as follows: "HEADING #25 Single 1 3/8 Wardrobe Doors in Dormitory All 12 Each to Have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 1279 3.5 x 3.5 1 Pull 3E 1 Lock DL2011xD138 1 Roller Latch 318D x 318 - head of door 3 Silencers' h. Heading #26: Add Heading to read as follows: "HEADING #26 Pair 1 3/8 Wardrobe Doors in Officer's Quarters All 13 Each Pair to Have: 3 pr. Hinges 1279 3.5 x 3.5 2 Pulls 3E 1 Lock DL2011 xD 138 1 Roller Latch 318D x 318 - head of active leaf 2 Flush Bolts 281 D 2 Silencers" 03860396/98 Page 8 of 24 Addendum #2 r, 2. Paragraph 3.3, VEHICLE MAINTENANCE a. Heading #1 (1) In the fifth line, revise "170A" to read "270A". b. Heading #11 (1) In the fifth line, revise "170A" to read "270A". C. Heading #14 (1) In the sixth line, revise "170A" to read "270A". 3. Paragraph 3.3, FIRE TRAINING TOWER a. Heading #1: Add the following to the end of the schedule: '3 Silencers" r b. Heading #2: Add the following to the end of the schedule: "3 Silencers" C. Heading #3: Add the following to the end of the schedule: 803 Silencers" d. Heading #4: Add the following to the end of the schedule: 03 Silencers" X. Section 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1. Paragraph 2.2.B.4: Revise "5/8" to read "1 /2". 2. Paragraph 2.2.C.4: Revise to read as follows: "4. Vapor Barrier Tape a. 12 mil thick polypropylene backing with integral acrylic adhesive. b. Acceptable Product: 3M Contractor Sheathing Tape No. 8086. • 3. Paragraph 3.2.A.3 a. Revise the last sentence to read as follows: "Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance wit manufacturer's written instructions." r, b. Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: "Brace partitions extending above ceiling only with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof deck above and spaced alternately at 4 feet on center maximum." i 4. Paragraph 3.2.E: Add paragraphs '8" and "9" to read as follows: "8. Use nails or screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing. 9. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occuring over firm bearing.' ,r Y. Section 09300 - TILE 1. Paragraph 3.3.D: Revise to read as follows: "D. Floor Tile 1. Over Mortar Bed: Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F111without reinforcing. 03860396/98 Page 9 of 24 Addendum #2 2. Over Cured Concrete Slab: Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F113. 3. In Showers a. Install shower pan in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. ' b. Install tile and accessories in accordance with TCA B415." Z. Section 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. Paragraph 2.1.C.4 a. Paragraph f: Change ".70 - .60" to read "NA". b. Paragraph g: Change "Minimum 25" to read "NA". c. Add paragraph "I" to read as follows: "I. Acceptable Product: USG perforated, Metal Face." 2. Paragraph 2.1.C.5 C a. Paragraph f: Change ".70 - .80" to read "NA". b. Paragraph g: Change "Minimum 25" to read "NA'. C. Add paragraph "I' to read as follows: "I. Acceptable Product: USG perforated, Metal Face." 3. Paragraph 2.1.C.6 a. Paragraph f: Change ".70 - .60" to read ".75 - .85". b. Paragraph g: Change "Minimum 25" to read "Minimum 30". c. Paragraph 1: Change "Square" to read "Reveal AA. Section 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 1. Paragraph 2.2.A: Add paragraph "4" to read as follows: "4. Acceptable Product: Armstrong Multicolor Premium Excelon series." 2. Paragraph 2.2.0 a. Paragraph 4: Revise "78" to read "72". b. Add paragraph "6" to read as follows: "6. Acceptable Product: Armstrong Possibilities series Petit Point or Tapestry design." 3. Paragraph 2.2.H.1: Add the following to the end of the paragraph: "Gypsum based fillers and leveling compounds will not be accepted." 4. Paragraph 2.2.H: Add paragraph "8" as follows: "8. Premolded Outside Comers: Base manufacturer's standard premolded outside comers." BB. Section 09680 - CARPETING 1. Paragraph 2.1: Add paragraph "C" to read as follows: 'C. Vinyl Edge Moldings/Reducer Strips 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. �.. 4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL. 5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH. 6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH.' r 03660396/98 Page 10 of 24 Addendum #2 2. Paragraph 2.2.D: Add paragraph "4" as follows: "4. Resilient Nosing: 2 inch wide x 1 % inch tall x 1 /4 inch thick, smooth surface, designed for butting to carpet each side; color as selected by Architect." 3. Paragraph 3.3: Add paragraph "L" as follows: "L. Install resilient nosing continuous along leading edge of stair risers only in Auditorium B 129.' CC. Section 09900 - PAINTING 1. Paragraph 3.5.A: Delete paragraph in its entirety. 2. Paragraph 3.5.13 a. Insert a period after 'areas' and delete "except mechanical and electrical rooms.' b. Add the following sentence: "Except where painting of scheduled wall or ceiling surface can only be accomplished by also painting these items, they will not be required to be painted in Yard Storage A103, Electrical A107, Electrical 6118, Water Heater B119, Telephone C121 and Electrical C125 of the Admininstration Building; Supply Issue 101, Van Storage 102, Mechanical 112, Electrical 113, Parts Storage 114, Vehicle Maintenance 116 and Vehicle Storage 116 of the Maintenance Building and all interior enclosed spaces of the Fire Training Tower 3. Paragraph 3.9.13: Under 'Concrete Masonry ICMU), after 'A118" add 'All 06, All 17% DD. Section 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1. Paragraph 3.5.13: Revise first system to read as follows: 'Concrete floor from South wall of Vehicle Maintenance Shop 115 to centerline of south support columns for overhead electric crane.' EE. Section 10100 -VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1. Paragraph 2.7: Add paragraph '2.7" to read as follows: '2.7 VERTICAL SLIDING MARKERBOARDS A. Frame: Clear anodized satin finish extruded aluminum approximately 4 inches wide x 6 % inches deep with removable head and jamb access covers. B. Chalktrough: Manufacturer's standard chalktrough full width of unit. C. Back Panel: Not required. D. Operating Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard adjustable counter -balanced weights operating over ball bearing neoprene end rollers and sheaves in each jamb. E. Acceptable Product: Claridge CSW series of size indicated on drawings.' 2. Paragraph 3.2: Add paragraph 'D' to read as follows: "D. Install vetical sliding unit to operate with minimal noise and without sidesway or binding.' FF. Section 10165 -PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1. Paragraph 2.2.H: Edit paragraph to read as follows: "H. Hardware: Satin stainless steel." 03860396/98 Page 11 of 24 i'" Addendum #2 Y� GG. Section 10170 - PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 1. Paragraph 1.3.A: Revise 'Framing and Sheathing" to read 'Rough Carpentry'. 2. Paragraph 1.4: Add paragraph "C" as follows: "C. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 3. Paragraph 1.7: Add paragraph 1.7 as follows: '1.7 Quality Assurance A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to 36 CFR Part 1191 for clearances, location and mounting height of accessories and loading requirements.' 4. Paragraph 2.2: Add paragraph "D" as follows: 'D. Shower Seats: Manufacturer's standard phenolic seat capable of supporting loading as required by 36 CFR Part 1191.' HH. Section 1400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES 1. Paragraph 2.3.C.1: Revise to read as follows: "l . Engraved Signs: 1 /16 inch thick laminated impact acrylic designed for reverse engraving. Provide with solid impact acrylic or plastic laminate backing." 2. Paragraph 2.3.C.8: Revise to read as follows: "8. Fabricate offfice signs with reverse engraved room number and slot behind matte acrylic for a 3 % inch wide by 2 inch high business card. Provide slot with finger cut- out.' It. Section 10500 - METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 1. Paragraph 1.2: Add paragraph 'E' to read as follows: "E. Benches and pedestals." 2. Paragraph 1.4.A: Replace "77" with "2". 3. Paragraph 1.6.A: Add paragraph "2' as follows: "2. Indicate bench sizes, configurations, layout and anchorages." 4. Paragraph 1.7.A: Add "and bench" after 'locker'. 5. Paragraph 2.2: Add paragraph "G' as follows: 'G. Benches: Maple.' 6. Paragraph 2.3: Add paragraph "D" as follows: "D. Benches 1. Top: Fabricate top from 1 1 /4 inch thick laminated maple, minimum 9 % inches wide. Provide with manufacturer's standard clear sealer. 2. Base: Fabricate base from 1 1/4 inch diameter steel tube with 10 ga. steel flanges welded to each end. Provide base assembly with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish of color as selected by Architect.' 7. Paragraph 2.3.6.1: Add "or bolted.' to end of sentence. r" 03860396/98 Page 12 of 24 Addendum #2 4 i B. Paragraph 3.2: Add paragraph "E" as follows: "E. Install benches level and parallel with face of adjacent lockers. Anchor to floor with drop -in type expansion anchors and galvanized steel hex -head bolts. Mount top of bench bench maximum 17 %z inches above finished floor. Equally space support bases and provide at a maximum spacing of 48 inches on center." 9. Paragraph 3.4: Revise second line of schedule to read as follows: 'Womens' Lockers B111, Single tier, solid body 18 x 18 x 72 Mons' Lockers 117 and Mans' Toilet/Locker 106" JJ. Section 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 1. Paragraph 1.3.A: Revise '06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing' to read '06112 - Rough Carpentry". KK. Section 10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1. Paragraph 1.1.13.2: Revise "Framing and Sheathing' to read ' Rough Carpentry'. 2. Paragraph 2.2.H: Delete paragraph in its entirety. LL. Section 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1. Paragraph 2.3: Add paragraph "N' as follows: 'N. Towel Bars ITB) 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541 /8B (Am.1), Type IV, Class 1, stainless steel, 12 inches long. 2. Acceptable Product: Bradley #9065 similar.' MM. Section 11452 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1. Replace paragraph 2.2: Add the following paragraphs: ,." 'C. Cooktop - Thermador SGN36GS 1. 36" Width 2. 1400 Watt Electric Griddle, Updraft r 3. Burners a. 2 Gas Burners - 950-6500 BTU/Hr b. 2 Gas Burners - 1650-11,000 BTU/Hr 4. Porcelain Coated Steel Grates 5. Stainless Steel Finish D. Built -In Electric Double Oven - General Electric JTP44GV 1. 2 Full Size 4.2 Cu/Ft Electric Self -Cleaning Ovens with Automatic Oven Door Lock 2. Variable Broil 3. Electronic Touch Pad Controls 4. Electronic Clock & Minute Timer 5. Electronic Oven Control with Automatic Oven Timer 6. Control Lockout Feature 7. 2 Oven Shelves/Each Oven 8. Large Frameless Glass Oven Door Windows on each Oven 9. Automatic Meat Thermometer 10. Finish: Black on Black r• 11. 6 Pass Broil Element 12. Audible Preheat Signal 13. Up Front Interior Lights 14. 6 Embossed Rack Positions .- 15. Extra Large Broiler Pan with Grid 4 03860396/98 Page 13 of 24 Addendum #2 17. Broiler Wattage = 3600 18. Bake Wattage = 2585 E. Garbage Disposal — Insinkerator #771 SE F. Vent Hood 1. Thermadore PH1480S with VCH-36 control housing & VTR-1400-Q Ventilator 2. Satin Finish 3. (2) 75 Watt Flood Lamps 4. Snap Out Filter & Lamps 5. 10" Minimum Duct, with Reg Transitions & Dampers 6. Hood Canopy Assembly, Rough -in Plate, Transition, Filters and Grease Troughs Adequate for Good Size. Provide all Required Supports, Bracing and Roof r" Flashing, Ducts and Exhaust Vents, Etc., for a Complete Functioning Exhaust j Hood, Light and Fan Switches are to be on Hood Canopy.' NN. Section 11815 - MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 1. Replace paragraph 1.2.A and B with the following: 'A. Automatic Retractable Air Hose Reel. B. Automatic Retractable Oil Hose Reel. c C. Welding Screen. D. TV Support Brackets.' 2. Paragraph 2.2: Add paragraph 'D" as follows: "D. TV Bracket 1. Steel tube support frame with a minimum of four pre -drilled mounting holes, a a two part perforated or solid steel plate support shelf, predrilled for niversal attachment to base of TV, capable of tilting a minimum of 7 degrees from horizontal and swiveling a minimum of 270 degrees and having a 175 lb. Load rating. 2. Size: 25 inches wide, 14 inches deep and project out from support wall approximately 27 inches total. 3. Provide with lockable universal VCR bracket attached to bottom of support shelf. 4. Bracket Finish: Manufacturer's standard black powder coat or baked enamel finish." 00. Section 12345, Fume Hood 1. Paragraph 2.3.P: Add paragraph "P' as follows: 'P. Fume Hood Ceiling Enclosure (1) Removable front panel mounted behind sash. (2) Fabricated of cold rolled steel, phosphate coated, with baked chemical ' resistant synthetic resin finish. Match fume hood." 2. Paragraph 3.2.1: Add paragraph "I" as follows: 'I. Install fume hood ceiling enclosure tight to ceiling and tight to fume hood.' PP. Section 12512 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1. Paragraph 3.6: Add paragraph 3.6 as follows: "3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide blinds at all glazed exterior alumium frames and windows except doors and adjacent sidelite frames at entrances and window frames with opaque .— glazing." 03860396198 Page 14 of 24 Addendum #2 r- r QQ. Section 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 1. Paragraph 2.1.A: Renumber paragraph 5 to 6 and add new paragraph "5" as follows: "5. Ceco Metal Buildings." RR. Section 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1. Page 15210-10, Floor Drain FD'C' shall be equal to Wade W-1304-TD in lieu of Wade W- 1104. SS. Section 15280 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 1. Paragraph 2.2: Add the following: 'Item Size Specifications Mechanical Coupling All UL/FM TT. Section 16721- Fire Alarm Systems 1. Page 16721-3, for clarification the fire alarm system shall be an analog, addressable system. 2. Page 16721-5, paragraph 2.1(A) add Simplex as an acceptable manufacturer. UU. Section 16770 - Public Address Systems 1. Page 16770-2, paragraph 2.11B) add Simplex as an acceptable manufacturer. VI. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS: A. Sheet G 1 1. SHEET INDEX a. Under "ARCHITECTURAL', sheet A17, revise "SOFIA' to read: "SOFFIT'. b. Under 'ARCHITECTURAL', sheet A18, revise "SOFIA" to read: "SOFFIT'. C. Under "ARCHITECTURAL", sheet A23, revise title to read: "INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS". B. Sheet C2: Replace original sheet C2 dated 8-10-98 with attached sheet C2 dated 8-30-98. C. Sheet C3: Replace original sheet C3 dated 8-10-98 with attached sheet C3 dated 8-30-98. D. Sheet C4: Replace original sheet C4 dated 8-10-98 with attached sheet C4 dated 8-30-98. E. Sheet C5 1. Gate Operator Keypad Detail: Add note 'SELF -LEVELING SEALANT" to expansion joint. 2. Gate Operator Keypad Detail: Revise note to read: 'KEYPAD SETBACK FROM EDGE OF PAVEMENT. REFER C2, NOTES 4 & 10." 3. Chain Link Fabric Fence Elevation: Revise rolling gate dimension to read: '25' ROLLING GATE (CLEAR OPENING)" F. Sheet S1 — Administration Foundation Wan 1. Change floor elevation of Yard Storage Room A103 from 99'-8' to 98'-4'. 2. Change floor elevation of Electrical Room B118 and Water Heater Room B119 from 99'-9 t %" to 98'-4". 3. Change finish floor elevation from 100'-0' to 99'-00. G. Sheet S2 — Administration Foundation Plan 1. Lower finish floor southwest of the roof expansion joint l'-0'. Refer supplemental drawing SDA 5. 03860396/98 Page 15 of 24 Addendum #2 r� H. Sheet S3 — Administration Framing Plan r„ 1. Lower all roof bearings V-0". I. Sheet S4 — Administration Framing Plan 1. Lower all roof bearings southwest of the roof expansion joint 1'-0". Refer supplemental j drawing SD-13. J. Sheet S5 — Administration Foundation Details 1. Modify detail 4/S5 as shown in supplemental drawing S1. 2. Change vertical dimension in detail 25/S5 from 3'-4" to 2'-40. 3. Modify detail 6/S6 as shown in supplemental drawing SD-1 1. K. Sheet S7 — Administration Framing Details 1. Change channel height in detail 7/S7 from 111'-0" to 110'-10". 2. Modify detail 25/S7 as shown in supplemental drawing SD-12. L. Sheet S10 — Maintenance Building Mezzanine Framing Plan 1. Provide L3x3x3/16 stops on bridge crane rail at both ends. M. Sheet S11 — Maintenance Building Roof Framing Plan 1. Provide exhaust fan support as shown in supplemental drawing SD-18. r N. Sheet S13 — Bum Tower Plans & Details 1. Attach channels shown in the elevator shaft as shown in supplemental drawing SD-17. O. Sheet S19 — General Notes ' 1. Change bearing elevation of drilled piers from 12 feet below finish floor to 14 feet below finish floor. Fro P. Sheet Al 1. Floor Plan General Notes a. Revise C to read: ". "EXTERIOR WALLS EAST OF APPARATUS BAY ARE 6" METAL STUDS U.N.O." b. Revise D to read: "REFER SHEETS A17, A18 & A19 FOR LOCATIONS OF FIRE RATED WALLS AND r,r FULL HEIGHTS WALLS." 2. Floor Plan Keyed Notes: a. Note 25: After "Not Used"; delete "LINTEL ELEVATION = 109'-1 3/8" AFF UNDER LINTEL.' b. Revise Note 38 to read: "DOWNSPOUT". C. Revise Covered Walkway Area as shown on Supplemental Drawing SD-1. Q. Sheet A2 1. Floor Plan Keyed Notes r■ a. Revise Note #1 to read: "6" CMU TYPE VI ON 5 3/8' HIGH CONCRETE CURB. ate• 03860396/98 Page 16 of 24 Addendum #2 ro r b. Revise Note #2 to read: "8" CMU TYPE VII. C. Delete Note #6 d. Revise Note #12 to read: "DOWNSPOUT" e. Revise Note #21 to read: r" "6" PIPE BOLLARD — REFER DETAIL 10/A1 SIM". 2. On the plan, outside of Dep. Chief of Operations C106, where Note 18 is, add a downspout and splashblock. 3. On the plan, outside of Women's C115 and Public Educ & Train Specialist D124 add two downspout nozzles and one splashblock at each location. Refer Mechanical and Detail 2/A1. Revise Splashblock Detail 1 /A2 from 18" wide x 30" long to 24" wide x 30" long. 4. Closet D112; Provide millwork as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-2. 5. Refer Supplemental Drawing SD-3 for ramp location and Stairs B128 stair change. r- R. Sheet A3 1. Floor Plan Keyed Notes a. Note 21: Omit splashblocks on west wall of Vehicle Storage 116 and west wall of Vehicle Maint. Shop 115. 2. Omit Door 01. S. Sheet A4 1. Fire Training Tower Keyed Notes: a. Revise Note #4 to read: "4" CMU SMOKE CHASE WITH 8" X 8' ACCESS PANEL. SET TOP OF FRAME AT 8'. r, OR AFF. REFER DETAIL 6/A40. b. Add Note #14 to read: "4" CMU SMOKE CHASE WITH 8" X 8" ACCESS PANEL. SET TOP OF FRAME AT 2'- 8" AFF. REFER DETAIL 6/A4". 2. Fire Training Tower Floor Plan — First Floor Interstitial and Second Floor Interstitial: Change Note #4 to Note #14. 3. Enlarged Plan 7/A4 a. Replace Plan Detail key 19/A24 with 19/A27. T. Sheet A5 P . 1. FIRE STATION #2 - Finish Schedule a. Disregard Frame and Millwork color selections under MISCELLANEOUS COLORS Heading. b. A101 WOMEN: Change Walls to: N—W3/W7; E—W7/W3; W—W8; Remarks, Add Note 10 C. A103 YARD STORAGE (1) Walls: Change N, S, E & W, to W4. r-, (2) Base: Change to B4. (3) Floor: Change to F12. d. A104 HOSE STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. e. A105 HALL: Change Walls to W1/W4 f. A107 ELECTRICAL: Change Walls N, S, E & W, to W4. 03860396/98 Page 17 of 24 Addendum #2 g. A116 WATER HEATER: Change Walls S & E to W4. h. All 17 HOSE DRYER: Change Floor to F12. i. All 18 APPARATUS BAY: Change Floor to F12. j. All 19 WATER HEATER: Change Floor to F12. �+ k. A137 EXERCISE: Change flooring to F2. { 2. TRAINING - Finish Schedule a. B111 WOMEN'S LOCKER: Change Walls to: N-W5/W7 & E-W7/W5. b. B112 WOMEN'S SHOWER: Change Walls to: N-W7, E-W7, S-W7 & W-W7; Remarks, Add Note 10. . C. B113 WOMENS' TOILET: Change Walls to: E-W7. d. B115 MENS' SHOWER ". 11) Walls: Change to: N-W3, E-W3/W7, S-W7 & W-W7/W3 12) Remarks: Add Note 10. e. B116 MENS' TOILET: Change Walls to E-W7. f. g. B126 AV STORAGE: Change Ceiling Type to C4. B129 AUDITORIUM 11) Floor: Change to F2. 121 Walls: Change East to W5/W6. 3. ADMINISTRATION - Finish Schedule a. C101 CORRIDOR (1) Walls: Replace South with W9/W5. �.. (2) Remarks: Add Note 11 b. C102 CORRIDOR (1) Walls: Replace West with W9/W5. (2) Remarks: Add Note 11. C. C103 CORRIDOR 11) Walls: Replace North with W9/W5. (2) Remarks: Add Note 11. t-t d. C113 WAITING ROOM: Change Floor to F2. e. C121 TELEPHONE ROOM: Change Ceiling to C6. ' f. C122 JANITOR: Change Floor to F12. g. C125 ELECTRICAL: Change Ceiling to C6. 4. FIRE TRAINING TOWER - Finish Schedule a. Change ALL Walls from W1 to W4. 5. FIRE MARSHALL- Finish Schedule a. D111 AV STORAGE: Change Floor to F1. ` b. D115 EVIDENCE STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. C. D125 WORKROOM: Change Floor to F1. d. D127 STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. �-+ e. D128 INTERROGATION ROOM: Change Ceiling to C4. 4. . f. D129 VIEWING: Change Ceiling to C4. 6. MAINTENANCE BUILDING- Finish Schedule a. 101 SUPPLY ISSUE: Change Floor to F12. ' b. 102 VAN STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. C. 104 WOMEN'S TOILET: Change Floor to F12. r, d. 106 MEN'S TOILET/LOCKER (1) Change E Wall to W3/W7 (2) Chande S Wall to W7/W3. e. 107 JANITOR: Change Floor to F12. f. 114 PARTS STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. g. 115 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE SHOP: Change Floor to F4/F12. F4 at North Bay only May with Hoist). r h. 116 VEHICLE STORAGE: Change Floor to F12. i. 118 AIR COMPRESSOR 11) Floor: Change to F12 (2) Walls: Change N to W9, E to W9, S to W4 & W to W4. 03860396/98 Page 18 of 24 Addendum #2 9- r r� 7. FINISH SCHEDULE FOOTNOTES a. Under "FLOORS" (1) Revise F4 to Read: TROWEL FINISHED SEALED CONCRETE WITH HARDENER". (2) Revise F12 to read: "TROWEL FINISH CONCRETE — SEALED". b. Under "BASE" (1) Add "B4 — NO FINISH'. C. Under "WALLS" (1) Revise W2 to read: "CERAMIC TILE ON WATER-RESISTANT GWB". (2) Revise W3 to read: "CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT ON WATER-RESISTANT GWB TO NOMINAL 4'-8'; GWB, PAINT 4'-8" AFF TO CEILING". (3) Revise W4 to read: 'CMU — NO FINISH'. (4) Add: 'W6 = ACOUSTICAL PANELS' (5) Add: " W9 =TYPE V CMU'. d. Under 'REMARKS" (1) Add: `10. REFER SHEET A21 FOR EXTENT OF FINISHES'. '11. CMU TYPE VII'. S. FIRE STATION #2 - Door Schedule a. Door 05A, Change L3 in Remarks to L2. b. Door 014, Change L3 in Remarks to L2. C. Under column 'REMARKS', Replace G10 with G9. 9. TRAINING - - Door Schedule a. Under column 'REMARKS", Replace G10 with G9. 10. FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE - Door Schedule a. Under column "REMARKS', Replace G10 with G9. U. Sheet A10 1. Wall Section 1 /A 10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0'. b. Change Elevation 108'-5 3/8' to 107'-5 3/80. C. Change Soffit Elevation to 108'-0". d. Change Deck Brg. Elevation to 109'-10 3/8'. e. Change TOM Elevation to 112'-1 3/8'. 03860396/98 Page 19 of 24 Addendum #2 f. Change Jst Brg Elevation to 111 `•10 7/80. g. Change Top of Stud Elevation to 113'-9 3/8". 2. Wall Section 2/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-00. b. Change Elevation 108'-5 3/8" to 107'-5 3180. C. Change Top of Bond Beam to 108'-9 3/8". d. Change Top of Projection to 113'-5 3/8". e. Change TOM to 115'-5 3/8". f. Change TOS to 112'-0". 3. Wall Section 3/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change Jst Brg Elev to 112'-1 3/8". C. Change Top of Stud to 114'-1 3/8". 4. Wall Section 4/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0'. b. Change Jst Brg Elev to 11 V-0 1 /2". C. Change Jst Brg Elev at Sim to 11 V-5 7/8". 5. Wall Section 5/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change TO to 112'-9 3/8" C. Change Top of Stud to 117'-8". 6. Wall Section 6/A10 a. Change Elevation 121'-1 3/8"to 120'-1 3/8". b. Change TOM to 122'-9 3/8". 7. Wall Section 7/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change Bond Beam to 108'-9 3/8". C. Change Jst Brg Elev to 11 V-5 3/8". d. Change TOM to 114'-1 3/8'. B. Wall Section 8/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0'. b. Change Top of Bond Beam to 108'-9 3/8". C. Change Jst Brg Elev to 112'-1 3/8". d. Change Bot of Lintel to 113'-0". e. Change Jst Brg to 119'-5 3/8". f. Change Top of Masonry to 119'- 5 3/8'. 9. Wall Section 9/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 98'-8". b. Change Lintel Brg Elev to 113'-1 3/8". C. Change TOM to 122'-9 3/8'. 10. Wall Section 10/A10 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change TOM Projection to 110'-1 3/8'. C. Change TOM to 115'-5 3/8'. 11. Detail15/A10 a. Revise Finish Floor Elevation to read: 'FF = 100'-0' or 99'-0". V. Sheet A11 1. Wall Section 1/A11 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change Jst Brg to 115'-4 2. Wall Section 2/A11 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0'. 3. Wall Section 3/A11 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0'. 03860396/98 Page 20 of 24 Addendum #2 4. Wall Section 4/A11 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change Top of Auditorium Floor to 102'-4". C. Change Jst Brg to 115'-4 5. Wall Section 5/A11 a. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". b. Change TOM to 17'-8". C. Change Jst Brg to 115'-4 6. Detail 16/A11 a. Change TOB to 114'-3 3/4". b. Change TOM to 114'-4". C. Change Top of Stud to 116'-4'. 7. Detail 17/A11 a. Change TOM to 114'-4'. b. Change Top of Stud to 116'-4". 8. Detail 18/A11 a. Move weep hole to above thru-wall flashing. W. Sheet Al2 1. Wall Section 7/Al2 8. Change Finish Floor Elevation to 99'-0". r... b. Change 109'-4' to 108'-4". C. Change 110'-0" to 109'-0'. X. Sheet A13 1. Revise Detail 10/A13 as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-4. 2. ROOF PLAN KEYED NOTES a. Note B: Revise to read as follows: r 6 'B. EXHAUST FAN REFER MECH FOR FLASHING" b. Note 16: Revise to read as follows: '16. FRESH AIR INTAKE REFER MECH FOR FLASHING" ►- Y. Sheet Al 1. Detail 2/A16, extend strip flashing completely over top of lead flashing. r, Z. Sheet A17 1. General Notes: a. Delete Note 'E". 2. Extend the wall between Electrical B118 and Water Heater B119 to the bottom of the roof deck above. Provide defelction track & fireseal. 3. Extend the wall between Electrical B118 / Water Heater B119 and Men's Lockers B117 to the bottom of the roof deck above. Provide defelction track & fireseal. 4. REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND a. Revise "1 HR RATED WALL' to read as follows: "1 HR RATED WALL BUILD TIGHT TO DECK." Refer Supplemental Drawing SD-26. AA. Sheet Al 1. General Notes: ..� 8. Delete Note "D". 2. Revise lighting layout in Entry Lobby D101as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD- 5. 3. Equipment Storage D133, extend walls to deck. 4. Revise Auditorium B129 as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-6. 0. 03860396/98 Page 21 of 24 Addendum #2 r 5. REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND a. Revise '1 HR RATED WALL" to read as follows: "1 HR RATED WALL BUILD TIGHT TO DECK." Refer Supplemental Drawing SD-26. BB. Sheet A19 1. Extend Electrical 113 walls to bottom of the roof deck above. Provide defelction track & fireseal. 2. REFLECTED CEILING LEGEND a. Revise "1 HR RATED WALL' to read as follows: " "1 HR RATED WALL BUILD TIGHT TO DECK.' Refer Supplemental Drawing SD-26. CC. Sheet A20 1. Reflected Ceiling Plan Keyed Notes a. Revise Note #5 to Read: "30'X30" ACCESS PANEL'. DD. Sheet A21 1. Locker Room Plans 7/A21 ,... a. Add Shower Curtain & Rod at entry to the showers at Women's Shower B112. EE. Sheet A22 1. Elevation 11 /A22: Add furr down above millwork. 2. Elevation 12/A22 t a. Add furr down above millwork. b. Replace section key 2/A11 with 2/A24. 3. Elevation 13/A22: Replace section key 1/Al 1 with 1 /A24. 4. Detail 18/A22 a. In the title, under "18/A22" add "PAINT. 5. Detail19/A22 a. In the title, under "19/A22" add "PLAM. 6. Detail 21 /A22 a. In the title, under "21 /A22" add "PLAM. 7. Detail22/A22 a. In the title, under '22/A22" add "PLAM. ` 8. Detail23/A22 a. In the title, under "23/A22" add "PLAM. 9. Detail25/A22 r i a. In the title, under "25/A22" add 'PLAM. 10. Detail27/A22 r, a. In the title, under "271A22" add "PLAM". 11. Detail28/A22 a. In the title, under "28/A22" add "PLAM'. �., 12. Details 32, 33 and 34/A22 a. In the title, change "INTERIOR" to read "AV". 13. Detail35/A22 a. In the title, under "35/A22" add "PLAM'. 14. Detail36/A22 a. In the title, under "36/A22" add "PLAM". 15. Detail37/A22 ... a. In the title, under "37/A22" add "PLAM". FF. Sheet A23 1. Detail 10/A23: In the title, under "10/A23" add "PLAM'. 2. Detail 11 /A23: In the title, under "11 /A23" change "TRANSP" to read 'PLAM". 03860396/98 Page 22 of 24 Addendum #2 3. Detail 12/A23: In the title, under "12/A23"change "TRANSP" to read "PLAM". 4. Detail 17/A23: In the title, under "17/A23"change "TRANSP" to read "PLAM". 5. Detail 24/A23: In the title, under "24/A23"change "PAINT" to read "PLAM". 6. Detail 25/A23 (near bottom right side of page): In the title, under "25/A23"change 25/A23. �^ 7. Detail 25/A23 (near bottom left of page): Change "25/A23" to read "27/A23" and change "TRANSP" to read "PLAM". r., GG. Sheet A24 1. Section 1 O/A24: Revise as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-7. HH. Sheet A25 1. Detail 21 /A25: Revise as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-8. f 2. Detail 22/A25: Revise as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-9. 3. Sill Detail 28/A25: Extend Sill Flashing past solid brick. ,,. 4. DETAIL 18/A25: Revise as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-27. II. Sheet A27 1. Detail 4/A27: Change embed plate to %x6xO'-6'. 2. Detail 6/A27: Revise as shown on attached Supplemental Drawing SD-10. 3. Detail 18/A27: Delete bottom rail. 4. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - Fire Station #2 a. Under 'REFRIGERATOR BY OTHERS" note "HOOK-UPS BY GC'. b. Under "UNDERCOUNTER ICEMAKER BY OTHERS" note 'HOOK-UPS BY GC'. JJ. Sheet A30 f^ 1. Equipment Schedule a. Description 17, Shear Pad; Furnished by GC, Installed by GC. b. Description 40, Hoist; Furnished by GC. :- c. Description 50 Washing Machine: Revise to Furnished by Owner, Hook-ups by GC. d. Description 51 Dryer: Revise to Furnished by Owner, Hook-ups by GC. KK. Sheet MPE1 1. Delete the radio control unit indicated by plan note #42. 2. Revise plan note #32 to read: "32. PROVIDE ONE 1' CONDUIT AND SPEAKER WIRING FROM TRAINING TOWER WALL MOUNTED SPEAKERS TO THE P.A. SYSTEM IN ELECTRICAL C125 (SHEET E6)." LL. Sheet P-4 1. On the drawings, Sheet P4, Fire Marshall's Office D113, gas line shall be sleeved in exterior wall and routed as indicated on Supplemental Drawing Sd-21. MM. Sheet P-6 1. Provide hose bibbs and correct water line sizes as indicated on Supplemental Drawing no's. SD-19 and SD-20. NN. Sheet M3 1. On the drawings, Sheet M3, Vehicle Main. Shop 115, truck exhaust shall be as indicated on Supplemental Drawing no's SD-23, 24, and 25 in lieu of contract plan. 00. Sheet M5 1. Replace the INFRA -RED RADIANT HEATER MOUNTING DETAIL with detail indicated on attached Supplemental Drawing no. PP. Sheet E2 1. Light Fixture Schedule, fixture Type "BC' shall be provided with a two lamp dimming ballast (light fixture schedule note #16). 03860396/98 Page 23 of 24 Addendum #2 P" 2. In Waiting Room C113 change the Type 'A" light fixtures to Type P "Z' light fixtures. 3. In Library/Plan Review D119 change the Type "BD' light fixtures to Type "Z" light fixtures. Provide a SPST wall switch in lieu of the dimmer switch shown. P. QQ. Sheet E3 1. Delete fixtures "Y" and "X" at deleted door no. 01 at Southwest corner of SUPPLY ISSUE 101. RR. Sheet E4 1. At Training Tower First Floor Plan, the exterior wall mounted speaker shown on the east shall also be weatherproof. SS. Sheets E5 1. In Apparatus Bay All delete the red mushroom pushbutton (plan notes #28 and #5 respectively). 2. In Apparatus Bay A118, relocate the duplex receptacle (plan note #51) to the east wall adjacent to the exhaust system air compressor. 3. In Apparatus Bay A118, the clock shown on the east wall shall be a clock hanger outlet only as specified. Clock will be by Owner. 4. In Multi -Purpose A122, delete the radio control unit (plan notes #6 & #10) and all associated conduit and wiring. 5. In Storage Room B139, relocate the duplex receptacle to the south wall. TT. Sheet E6 1. In Dep. Chief of Support C109, revise the layout of all wiring devices so as to be a mirror image of Dep. Chief of Operations C106. 2. In Classroom B134, connect the motorized projection screen (plan note #28) to circuit PB- 42 with 2 #12 & #12 Gr. in %" C. 3. In Command C127, provide two wall mounted microphone outlets (one on the north wall and one on the south wall). Provide %" C. from each outlet to the P.A. System rack in Electrical C125. UU. Sheet E7 1. In Parts Storage 114, relocate the two wiring pullboxes (plan notes #27 & #28) into Elec. 113 along the north wall. 2. In Parts Storage 114, relocate Panel "MPA' (plan note #1) to the north wall of Elec. 113. 3. In Elec. 113, change Transformer'TMA" (plan note #2) to be suspended from the structure. W. Sheet E10 1. Delete fire alarm pull station and hom at deleted door no. 01 at Southwest corner of SUPPLY ISSUE 101. WW. Sheet El 1. In Apparatus Bay All delete the red mushroom pushbutton (plan notes #28 and #5 respectively). XX. Sheet E14 1. On the P.A. System Riser Diagram, delete the V C. and wiring to the main radio control unit. 2. Maintenance Building Riser Diagram, change Transformer "TMA' to be suspended from the structure in lieu of floor mounting. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 a-, 03860396/98 Page 24 of 24 Addendum #2 i r; BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: #98212 - FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX Bid of {hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a having carefully examined the drawings, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the drawings, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: Dollars ( S SERVICES: Dollars {S TOTAL BASE BID: Dollars {S ALTERNATE BID #1: Training field paving, including subbase, base and curb and gutter. MATERIALS: Dollars {S I SERVICES: Dollars {S ) A TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #1: Dollars ($ ALTERNATE BID #2: Additional metal lockers. MATERIALS: Dollars IS 1 SERVICES: Dollars IS I TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #2: Dollars {S ) 1 P" ALTERNATE BID #3: Concrete sidewalks. MATERIALS: Dollars (S 1 SERVICES: Dollars ($ ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #3: Dollars ($ ALTERNATE BID #4: Training field water service line. MATERIALS: Dollars 18 1 SERVICES: Dollars (S 1 TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #4: Dollars (S 1 ALTERNATE BID #5: Thermoplastic single -ply membrane roofing. MATERIALS: Dollars (S SERVICES: Dollars ($ 1 TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #5: Dollars ($ 1 ALTERNATE BID #6: Fixed lecture tables. r.. MATERIALS: Dollars I$1 r.. SERVICES: Dollars I$ 1 TOTAL ALTERNATE BID 06: Dollars ($ UNIT PRICES: r, UNIT PRICE #1: Drilled piers specified in Section 02375 including drilling, removal of j drilled material, casing, concrete and reinforcing. r� TOTAL UNIT PRICE #1: Dollars/C.Y. 1$ •-- UNIT PRICE #2: Asphaltic concrete paving specified in Section 02513 including prepared subbase and base specified in Section 02231, topping, striping and bumpers. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #2: Dollars/S.Y. (S UNIT PRICE #3: Concrete sidewalks specified in Section 02521 including prepared subbase and base. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #3: Dollars/S.F. (S 1 2 UNIT PRICE #4: Concrete paving specified in Section 02523 including prepared subbase and base specified in Section 02231, striping and bumpers. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #4: Dollars/S.Y. ($ ) UNIT PRICE #5: Water line specified in Section 02665 including trenching, piping, backfill and testing. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #5: Dollars/L.F. ($ ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written 'Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the Training Tower, Bum House and r- Training Field Paving and Training Field Water Service Line included in Alternate numbers 1 and 4 (if accepted) within 270 consecutive calendar days and the entire project within 450 (FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $1,600.00 (ONE r THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. t•" Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. r The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the drawings, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from �• a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid Is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond In the sum of Dollars .. ($ I. which It is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages In the event the bid Is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents. Insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. 3 Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: Fax: (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date r '^ 4 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 07150 7 DAMPPROOFING 7 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. P, 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing. 1.3 Related Sections: A. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete: supporting and covering construction. B. Section 15210 - Plumbing Systems: Roof drain flashing flanges. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C836 - High Solids Content, Cold Liquid -Applied Elastomeric. B. ASTM D412 - Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. r C. ASTM D570 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. D. ASTM D903 - Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. E. ASTM D1970 - Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. r F. ASTM D1876 - Peel Resistance of Adhesives. G. ASTM D5385 - Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproof Membranes. H. ASTM E96 - Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. I. ASTM E154 - Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls or as Ground Cover. J. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual. r 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Waterproofing System: Capable of resisting and preventing moisture migration through r' concrete slab to metal decking. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 0— A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Product Data: Submit data for surface conditioner, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane. r-� D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. "� 03860396198 DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 1 i �. FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Membrane Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS r A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.10 WARRANTY r. A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. C. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1. Carlisle Waterproofing Systems. 2. W.R. Grace & Co.. 3. W.R. Meadows. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Composite Laminate Membrane: Comprised of minimum 55 mil thickness of rubberized asphalt complying with ASTM D1970 laminated to a 4 mil polyethylene film on the face and manufacturer's standard release sheet on the adhesive sheet; 48 inch wide roll; conforming to the following criteria: Property Is;:t Method, Results Tensile D412 IC) Mod. 300 psi Elongation* D412 IC) Mod. 300% (min.) Permeance E96 IB) .05 perms r•, Low Temp. Flexibility D 1970 Unaffected @ -45o F Crack Cycling 1100 cycles) C836 Unaffected @ -25o F r Peel Strength D903 7.5 lb/in. width (min.) Lap Adhesion D1876 Mod. 7.0 lb/in. width 03860396/98 DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 2 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Prope= Puncture Resistance Exposure to fungi H2O Absorption Hydrostatic head 2.3 ACCESSORIES JUI Method E154 GSA -PBS 07115 D570 D5385 Results 40 lb. Imin.) 16 wks, no effect 0.1 % by wt. Imax) 231 ft. Imin.) 900-9330 A. Primer type, compatible with membrane. B. Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. C. Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Protection Board: 1 /8 inch thick asphalt impregnated organic mat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. D. Verify substrate surface slopes to drain for horizontal waterproofing applications. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. D. Seal cracks and joints with non -shrink grout or sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Membrane 1. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. 2. Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. 3. Lap sides and ends. 4. Overlap edge seams 2-1/2 inches and end seams 4 inches. Stagger seams and seal permanently waterproof. 5. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams. Coordinate with floor drain installation. 6. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. 7. Extend membrane up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter to height flush with horizontal surface. 8. Seal items protruding to or penetrating through membrane and install Counterflashing membrane material. B. Protection Board 1. Adhere protection board to substrate with mastic to tacky dampproofing surface. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. r 03860396/98 DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01410 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services. B. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing. C. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 24 hours, inspect for leaks. D. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building. E. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. C. Protect membrane from damage by adhering protection board over membrane surface. Scribe and cut boards around projections and interruptions. 03860396/98 END OF SECTION DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 08333 r• OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ■'° A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling door, manual operation. B. Operating hardware r.. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys for placement by this section. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. PM 1.4 REFERENCES �• A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc -coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION r A. Manual Operation: Manual push up unit with overhead counter balance device, requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. PM 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf, with r maximum deflection of 1/120, and without damage to door or assembly components. E B. Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Submit general construction, component connections and details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, and adjustment and alignment procedures. r, t 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. r' 03860396/98 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 900-9330 A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing overhead coiling doors with minimum five years experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cookson Co. B. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. C. Raynor Garage Door D. Overhead Door Corporation E. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Material and Equipment 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Curtain: Conform to the following requirements: 1. Steel Slats: Interlocking, minimum 24 gage of ASTM A653 steel, minimum galvanized coating designation G90 (Z275) in accordance with ASTM A924. a. Type: Sandwich slat construction with manufacturer's standard insulated core. 2. Nominal Slat Size: 3 inches wide by required length. 3. Slat Ends: Each slat fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 4. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles, channels, or tubes to provide reinforcement and positive contact with floor in closed position. B. Guides: Minimum 3/16 inch; galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653, minimum galvanized coating designation G90 (Z275) in accordance with ASTM A924. 1. Provide continuous angles of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim; mounting brackets of same metal. C. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension. D. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard square or rounded shape, minimum 24 gage steel; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. E. Hardware: 1. Locks: Provide locks to allow doors to be secured. a. Manual Doors: Manufacturer's standard cylinder dead lock on inside at door jamb, key operated from exterior and interior. 2. Cylinders: Furnished under Section 08700 - Door Hardware, installed as part of Work of this section. 3. Handle: Inside side mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle. 4. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type at head, jambs and sill as required for complete weathertight installation. 2.3 SHOP FINISHING A. Curtain Slats: Steel, primed. B. Steel Guides and Hood Enclosure: Prime paint. 0 �- 03860396/98 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-933C i i PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION i A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. B. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. C. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. D. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07900. E. install perimeter trim and closures. r" 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES r A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 /16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1 /16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1 /8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. p� [ 3.4 ADJUSTING r A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust door hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Clean door and components. C. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION '� 03860396/98 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08330 - 3 N. s _ Nco s _ C jn — N N ■ e iD N N SECTION 2'-sw rLAIN 3/4" sc DETAIL 1 /SD1 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS CONC WALK 3" PIPE NOTE: THICKEN CONC SLAB AT PIPE WALK LINE 3000 PSI CONCRETE - SMOOTH FINISH SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-1 L 0 4t C 0 i� ( I 4t ( I It 3'-0" I 4'-8 11//8f FIXED SHELF CLOTHES HANGER ROD 3/4" ADJ SHELVES W/ HARDWD EDGES SCHEDULED BASE 3/8" sc ELEVATION 28/A23 CLOSET D112 PAINT Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Dote: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-2 14'1\AL2 (D TRAINING ` SECRETARY ORRI 9 Al H 100'-0" DISTRICT CHIEF C1 44 � B124 B107 WORKROOM C124 f / TLT 99'-0" B25 \ AV � IBRARY 4LL : B12s C22 TELE , � � \ ROOM CORR f C121 HALL B10a \ , B105 V STO 7 A21 / 626 \ ' � B126 B06 VES Bl AL2 29 B08 I ST AV 102, 4, 127 PROJECTION STAIRS B132 0 28 27 99'-0" 9'-8 00'- " 01'- 01'- 102'- " B2 r 00*** 7/Al2 AIInITnRIIIM 1 8" sc PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN Rruuu..ruuu■ Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING `..■.■:■■.r:;...■: Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 ..■■■.■■■■...r..r. :� :. ■:.5: LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project l: 03.8602, 8603 & .+ u Iwo uru Room ... — !. `I �8604.97 :■ Room :■■:::■■::: Sheet Number: SD-3 ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ I• L L 1/2"0 THREADED SAG RODS ® 48" O.C. OH DOOR TRACK PREFIN MTL PANEL INSUL C8x11.5 EPDM WEATHERSEAL PANEL CLOSURE SCHED OPNG HEIGHT C4x5.4x0'-5" - WELD TO C8x11.5 DOOR WEATHERSTRIP SCHED OH DOOR 1 1/2" sc DETAIL 1O/A13 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT Project Address: EAST URSULINE & LUBBOCK, TEXAS COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number. SD-4 r 0 1 /8"=1'-0' sc PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN t ENTRY LOBBY D101 NORTH No Text I` FLUORESCENT LIGHT 3/4"x4" HDWD TRIM 1/4"x3/4" HDWD TRIM 1 /2"x1 /2"x1 /2" EGG CRATE LENS PROVIDE BLOCKING 1 /4" TEMPERED GLASS SLIDING DOORS 1/4" TEMPERED T1 GLASS SHELVES SHELF STD & BRACKET 1 /4" HDWD BACK W/ FABRIC COVERED TACK - BOARD BETWEEN STANDARDS WOOD BLOCKING SCHED BASE 3/4" sc SECTION 10/A24 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSc Project f 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-7 FACE BRICK THRU-WALL FLASHING -- WEEPS @ 24" OC 1 /2" GYP SHEATHING BATT INSULATION 5/8" GWB 6" MTL STUD RUNNER DBL STUD @ JAMB SEALANT LINTEL, REF STRUC PAINT TO MATCH MASONRY ABOVE SCHED HM FRAME W/ 1 3/8" RETURN ® EXT SIDE SCHED DOOR 1 1/2 11 /2" sc HEAD JAMB SIM 21/A25 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 .& 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-8 3 1 /8" REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE SCHED BASE THRESHOLD, SET IN SEALANT WITH EXP BOLTS ® 6" 0C, 4rSTARTING 1" FROM SLOPE EACH END, SEAL ENDS O 4 40'/_�%' 0 0 00 a o °° 4 0 0 CONC FLOOR SLAB, REFER TO STRUCT PLAN 1/2" EXP JOINT 1 1/2 it sc HEAD/JAMB 22/A25 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSC Project f 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-9 )R HOUSING z 1/4x11 1/2x 4GTH - PAINT -./4 11 5/8" 1 112" sc HEAD 6/A27 ■wwwwwwwwwwwww■ ■wwwwrrwrrrrww■ ■rrrrrrrrrwrrr■ Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX ■uuwruurru ■•::'••':;■••:: Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD s, LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSc Project f 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD -10 .i T �.nn�vn 4 vk�m 3/4" sc SECTION SECTION 4/S55 ••••••••• UN: Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX ••::'•••:D'••:: Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD King '■ LUBBOCK TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Dote: 9-30-98 PSc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-11 rw i r" a i r i FM STEP Pw4V� w,Tq Rwg sl-om L3 1/20 1/2x3/16 I L3x3x3/16 AT 4'-0" 1 //N�L 3t �'h�o x coA,T �L� �'jK~�Iv x casT L3V 3x311W nr 4 '-O'� Afrtw3E>� F.f'J IDE rWe R� yc'po��- L3-c3x1'11w y fit 3/4sc SECTION -L 25/S7 Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSc Project /: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-12 rA Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-13 H9 B .T .-. EL, 99 3/4sc SECTION Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-1 4 \ . 42 i is 41 ' t8 r. 42 / /24 30 © Is 35 / `\ 18 30 F24 24 30 13 24 30 A 4 l les3'-9 3/4' ♦ n r RV-3 J/4' N Q is 18 \ J/ is qr 1 /' 1 / 30 24 q Is 42 30 4 r b � 24 ,fib Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Dote: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS Psc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-15 4-p ¢x - 6/S6 Prbject Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD ►ssue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-16 r4 t r a E� Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-17 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9 — 30 — 9 8 PSc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-18 l : l 1 1 1 1 z 1 -1 =-- - l - .1 I . T 7.1 —1 -- A , - I -I r-I , --l. , l 0 0 z n 0 V C�m cam. O nCo �N-0 D' C ;u >mm', N�z �Q W r r m Ex a V N cyi � C 3 ° I j Q cb not m cn000cD? I o po w04 r ) co ca oI CD �I N cD 00 D> a) Z O C) Ro MATCHLINE I_ AIR OMB RE;SO GALL VAVVE / DOWN TO a BALL QUICK — ma r— 1/2' AIR LINE DOWN TO' 36' AFF WITH BALL VALVE A 1/2' QUICK CONNECT. 1 1/A• 1 1/A...._.._— . _..- ____1 I ---- -- ---------A -------- -^------------------- - 4/Zr-------A I-T--- 1/2' r 1 1 1• 1' —� 1• I I 1/2' AIR LINE DOWN TO 36' AFF WITH 4/2' QUICK CONNECT i I 2 4/2' HV sN-98 I I 3. I r 1 f, f 1 r L-----J 1 r<< Ir I t I t 2• A I I I r '� 2' VTR SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING 1 1 I 1 ( I I I I SUSPEND FROM STRUCTURE 1 I AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. 1 I I 1 1 I I I I I 4/2' AIR LINE DOWN TO 36' AFF WITH BALL 1 I VALVE It 1/2' QUICK G 1 I I CONNECT. ( I 1 I 1 I 4. I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 I I A 11 -------- ------------------3-----------------------------------t�--- A 4"* tttftfnt�tt■■■ftt BMW am HUH: — ■//// ■ //■/1\ I■■■■/■■■■■■■■■ ■■ OP 11 ■//■/■■ ■■ ■/f■■■■ v A� �� -------------------------- 3 ------------------------ ---- 0�.0 - z O Iz 3 A A y 19 1/2• N r m -n 14144 o55 m 3/4• a) O C 0 n T�C-0 A r XZK D M M N�� O 1/2' +— r o 3/f v�.R VEHICLE MAINT SHOP co m O 115 C x 0 3/4' AIR LINE DOWN TO 360 36• AFF WITH BALL ' SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING 2 VALVE & 4/2' GIUICK CONNECT. ( . ( a C 2. 1/2' AIR LINE DOWN TO T— 36' AFF WITH BALL Z 3 S 11/2• VALVE & 4/2' QUICK cr n I l CONNECT. 1/2 A-�— Cn 00 O cD Z O �CAff- 0 O W (y N D bo WO r E 2 4/2' PIPE 2' AFF 'ALVE J O co 0 0 W/MALE CONNECTION 3/4' �l fV cD Z7 A 4 4/2' 00 O . > 00 — 2 1/2• 1/2• 0 G� r� t 2' GAS RISE IS' ABOVE GRADE WITH GAS COCK TO RISE IN WALL. 2' GAS RISE UP IN WALL TO ATTIC SPACE. OFFSET IN ATTIC TO RISE TO ROOF. SLEEVE GAS LINE THRU WALLATTIC AND ROOF. i AV $TOR D111 V(GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR W/INTERNAL RELIEF VALVE FROM 20 TO B OZ. FOR 2723 CFH. CONFERENCE 2' VTR G 3'R 4 ASSIST I&FIRE MARSHALL D114 DLO D112 WH FIRE MARSHALL D113 �df ..b r-4 4/4' �1p �tP RTU 048-95 3/4' Atti WORKROOM CM25 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING SCALE: 1/8' = 'I'— O' Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS MAP ROOM D126 —4 4/4• G DATA D132 0p; N4, NORTH SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number. SD-21 FM ROOF DECK WASHER E / LOCK NUT II BAR JOIST �- UNISTRUT 3/8' ALL THREAD ROD. A THUS 3/8' ROD CROSS BRACING. WELDED TO HANGER RODS. ( TYPICAL 2 SIDES AS INDICATED) INFRA -RED HEATER APPROX. 30 DEG. MOUNT AT 16'-O' AFF INFRA - RED RADIANT HEATER MOUNTING DETAIL NO SCALE Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSc Project /: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-22 NTH. :T r101YS. 'WER 45 POS Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS - SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Date: 9-30-98 PSc Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-23 6' RA MTD. 77X77/R-1 1 Project Nome: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Project address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD LUBBOCK, TEXAS SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Issue Dote: 9-30-98 PSC Project #: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-24 ,s id J In N d a 0 i a SECTION _ I/M3 SCALE: 1/4' ■ 1'-0' Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Dote: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 Sheet Number: SD-25 FIRESEAL (E DEFLECTION 5/8" GWB C DECK PROFIT APPLICABLE MTL STUD - PLAN FOR E 5/8" TYPE 2" SC WALL SECTION FLECTION TRACK AL GWB @ JOIST NETRATIONS HED CLG 8" TYPE Y GWB L STUD - REFER )OR PLANS FOR 'E RIMETER CAULK - CH SIDE ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ............... ............... Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Date: 9-30-98 LUBBOCK, ■, „■■.TEXAS Psc Project: 03.8602, 8603 & Munn 8604.97 ::::■■'`.:■■::: Sheet Number: SD-26 ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ OWN r.-= r-R P.M ►d 2" sc HEAD/SILL 18/A25 Project Name: FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING ■.ww......r.w.■ ■.€ N�'�;r`:i� Project Address: EAST URSULINE & MLK BLVD Issue Dote: 9-30-98 a, .. �:In H..: LUBBOCK, TEXAS PSC Project 1: 03.8602, 8603 & 8604.97 owns ., s a::::ww::owd: .. .............. Sheet Number: SD-27 F 7 r-� i P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 rM #98212, Addendum #1 Office of Purchasing ADDENDUM #1 ITB #98212 FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX MAILED TO VENDOR: October 1,1998 OLD CLOSE DATE: October 6, 1998 @ 2:00 PM NEW CLOSE DATE: October 14,1998 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from October 6, 1998 @ 2:00 PM to the new closing date of October 14, 1998 @ 2:00 PM. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us TH4nS YOU, RouffieI Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 98212ad1.doc CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 98212 PROJECT NUMBER: 9330.9211.30000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT CITY OF LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX FIRE DEPARTMENT ADMINISTRATION FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE FIRE TRAINING ACADEMY FIRE STATION #2 FIRE TRAINING TOWER/BURN HOUSE VEHICLE MAINTENANCE VEHICLE/SUPPLY STORAGE AUGUST 1998 '�jfr N NNN■■N■NN■ ■■■■•■■■■•..■■■■ �f. P � � Fss I NNNN••woo■■ J� Q 1j/ 1 O� .....�;..�•s , n Ii■iiiir•iiwiiiiii r ,- PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER. NC. 4 • Ez e'rs • Architects • Plarms ••• 61 o ie7 0 •■■.a...w■■■■•N .own.••1 ' DIVISIONS 1THROUGH 14 O� Y Co. PARKHILL, SMITH 6 COOPER, INC. • Erpineeot rs • Architects ■ Plamers .:.. .: T■r s.a ■■■.w■•...■•■N �omo••1 DIVISIONS 2,3 AND 5 i� Jr: t./ ................................. GREGORY A HORNE i ............................. �...., s� ..• Z_ 83489 0 83t-9 Off f � AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. rtl. N R. AGtYEv►r Y6CUNICAL ELECTRICAL CONSUMC ENCIN= 37645 .,OCK TAGS �4�.f g� •` DIVISIONS 15 AND 16 _ k REFS WI w FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT PAGES DOCUMENT NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SECTION 00200 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS .................. 1 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 SECTION 01019 SECTION 01039 SECTION 01090 SECTION 01300 SECTION 01410 SECTION 01500 SECTION 01600 SECTION 01650 SECTION 01700 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK SECTION 02110 SECTION 02200 SECTION 02231 SECTION 02280 SECTION 02375 SECTION 02511 SECTION 02520 SECTION 02521 SECTION 02665 SECTION 02830 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 03300 r, f r 03860396/98 r SUMMARY OF WORK 2 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS ......................... 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS ............................... 7 SUBMITTALS ....................................... 3 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ........................ 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ............................... 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ............................ 2 STARTING OF SYSTEMS ............................... 2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ............ .................... 3 SITE CLEARING ................................ 2 EARTHWORK ........................................ 7 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES ............................ 3 SOIL TREATMENT .................................... 2 DRILLED PIERS ....................................... 4 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING .......................... 5 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING ................... 10 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS ............... 5 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS ............... 9 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ......................... 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ............................. 13 PAGE - 1 A- FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 -- DIVISION 4 MASONRY SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ..................................... 10 DIVISION 5 METAL SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL .................................. 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS ... ...................... ... .. 4 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK ........................................ 5 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS ................................ 7 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06112 ROUGH CARPENTRY ................ 4 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK .................................. 5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION " SECTION 07150 DAMPPROOFING ........... .. .............. r-` SECTION 07181 WATER REPELLANT COATING ............................ 3 ---SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION ................................. 3 SECTION 07241 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM ................. 4 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING....................................... 2 SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES .. ........ ................. ... 4 SECTION 07410 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS ..................... 9 SECTION 07536 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING ............ :.............. 6 SECTION 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ............ 8 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL ....................................... 6 SECTION 07724 ROOF HATCH ......................................... SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS .......... ................ .... 6 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ............................. 4 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ................................. 5 SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS ..................................... 2 SECTION 08364 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ...................... 6 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ................. 7 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS ... ... ......... ... .... 4 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE ........................................ 17 SECTION 08800 GLAZING ........................... 5 DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ............................ 4 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS .............................. 7 SECTION 09300 TILE .............................................. 6 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ................................ 4 SECTION 09520 ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT ......................... 3 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE .......................... 4 •- SECTION 09680 CARPETING ......................................... 3 SECTION 09900 PAINTING .......................................... 7 SECTION 09960 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING ........................... 4 03860396/98 PAGE-2 rr � I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10100 SECTION 10165 SECTION 10170 SECTION 10210 SECTION 10260 SECTION 10270 SECTION 10350 SECTION 10400 SECTION 10500 SECTION 10522 SECTION 10651 SECTION 10800 SECTION 10820 900-9330 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS .............................. 3 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS ................ 3 PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS .............. 3 METAL WALL LOUVERS ................................ 3 CORNER GUARDS ................... 3 ACCESS FLOORING ................................... 4 FLAGPOLES .. .................................... 4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES ................................. 3 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS ............................ 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES ........... 3 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS ........................... 3 TOILET ACCESSORIES ................................. 8 SHOWER DOORS ..................................... 1 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS .................................. 2 SECTION 11452 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES ............................... 3 SECTION 11815 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT ............................ 2 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12345 FUME HOOD ......................................... 7 SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS ............................ 3 SECTION 12630 FIXED LECTURE TABLES ............................... 3 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13121 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS ............................. 5 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14630 OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL CRANES ......................... 16 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL .................... 3 SECTION 15100 SITE UTILITIES ........................................ 5 SECTION 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ............................... 5 SECTION 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS .................................. 11 SECTION 15260 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS ........................... 2 SECTION 15275 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM ................................ 2 SECTION 15280 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM ...................... 7 SECTION 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION ..................................... 6 SECTION 15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................... 2 SECTION 15400 INSULATION ......................................... 3 SECTION 15500 EQUIPMENT ......................................... 11 SECTION 15550 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM ................... 14 SECTION 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ... 2 03860396/98 PAGE - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL ..................... 3 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ............................... 9 SECTION 16115 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT ......................... 4 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS ................. ..... .............. 4 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES ....... ..... ....................... 5 SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS ................ 2 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ............................. 3 SECTION 16400 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ................................... 4 SECTION 16425 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS ............................. 6 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING .............................. 5 SECTION 16441 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES ................ 2 SECTION 16460 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS .............................. 3 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS....................................... 4 SECTION 16475 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ... 3 SECTION 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS .................................. 5 SECTION 16495 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS ........................ 7 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING ........................................... 5 SECTION 16620 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM ..................... 9 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS ................................. 12 SECTION 16770 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS ..................... 8 SECTION 16915 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS ............................ 3 03860396198 PAGE - 4 No Text i r� NOTICE TO BIDDERS ' BID #98212 I Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 r o'clock p.m, on the 6th day of October, 1998, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to f furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 22nd day of October,1998, at the Municipal Building, 162513th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Eg1bg of @ or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified ,• check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without I recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a j guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on day of September, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Training Room - L01, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to j this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. r .e w a opal i a The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. Cityof Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid inormation made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. 1CITY OF LUBBOCK V� VICTOR KIL AN PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from Parkhill Smith & Cooper at 4010 Avenue R, Lubbock, Texas 79412; Telephone (806) 747-0161IFax (806) 747-7146. A refundable deposit of $150.00 will be required. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS r 1, GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK J a' The contractor shall fumish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to ,,. complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General j Conditions. logo, All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the! contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER j CITY OF LUBBOCK r P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 775-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 365 (THREE HUNDRED SIXTY FIVE) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 10. , PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be fumished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or , others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of ` barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger fife or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given 3 is .L sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted., It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 4 f f 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, swom, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES h Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID l The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled +". in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work l contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govem. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly i authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each I member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid i shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no i� bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. i 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. r (g) Special Conditions (if any). ti (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: M 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. ;MW r 6 01. 4C_ 7�1 A-�L I 7 BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE- 7-20-1 5 DATE: —/'4 =2 W PROJECT NUMBER: #98212 - FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX Bid of DAY-.- 10 Lt.l—nb ��c.Z� %ZU �'V %/--�Gt (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a ,f / 2c=— " _/VL57h�4 having carefully examined the drawings, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the drawings, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: Dollars (s.2r &!k2 OC%0• ) �o TOTAL BASE BID: ALTERNATE BID #1: Dollars t •el tar �1 TG:. 71 454J Dollars Is T y�� r xy). "I-) Training field paving, including subbase, base and curb and gutter. MATERIALS; r1w s;Awl 7/rru Nv,jAme Dollars (S 0 3 S U • �� ) SERVICES: JQ,��� %/'ass:>h� Tat Agm� eel F A x Dollars (s 70 t% • �'�l 1 pN Ao, br—) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #1: F-Ay +1�&,-~4 &-iLj A,,,4- 4 Dollars APP •(s / �. % D O • ) ALTERNATE BID #2: Additional metal lockers. MATERIALS: Fe- 01 A— el Dollars ($ SAC) • SERVICES: Dollars ($ 1 OOC3 AoA TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #2: S i Y- ;7AM0SA a Dollars ALTERNATE BID #3: Concrete sidewalks. ` MATERIALS: �t� .. �,.� �iit�sh�ci Dollars I$ SERVICES: _r.!r i., �i!,+ _S A-d Dollars (1; 90 o0o • � 1 TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #3:Tw An.z � 1rla�,��.�r t� DollarsAA3 000 r ALTERNATE BID # Training field water service line. 17 N; N-'-- MATERIALS: �7_,�,. %tom-skN�j Dollars I$ _ ) l t SERVICES: ;kX K+•t 4-o""d CSoX d:.-,pe1,Ca � Dollars I$ �Z. ��d•� � 1 r11 l TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #4 OP6 aytV_ V ,R Arc1 S�: a: or cl S,r� ar�ipd Dollars APO M ' k ALTERNATE BID #5: Thermoplastic single -ply membrane roofing. � MATERIALS: )c; 7'%r�� �� /5,,1L_ I��,� �a �-� Dollars �� 00.6. ($ 5 `t�1 SERVICES: Z aXo Dollars ($ } TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #5: �-c sE c, �.*r� ��rt c� "P Dollars (S .S q ALTERNATE BID #6: lecture tables. r tjFixed MATERIALS: X-• s�t¢� ?i^oo�� Dollars IS / SERVICES: (jrc•�s'1w<< `T�v� �r�r�� Dollars 0 f ..!! TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #6:-A,;j e � eu 14-1f� n",Q Dollars { 5 1©1 200 . t UNIT PRICES: UNIT PRICE #1: Drilled piers specified in Section 02375 including drilling, removal of drilled material, casing, concrete and reinforcing. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #1: 0Nz; A0h4'R:r.'k s;'& Dollars/C.Y. ($ /b o. � I UNIT PRICE #2: Asphaltic concrete paving specified in Section 02513 including prepared subbase and base specified in Section 02231, topping, striping and bumpers. a TOTAL UNIT PRICE #2: ,a VZ't Dollars/S.Y. ($ 11+ , _ I r UNIT PRICE #3: t Concrete sidewalks specified in Section 02521 including prepared subbase and base. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #3:1 �f�� T /`Nct S�iea Dollars/S.F. 2 r r ! UNIT PRICE #4: Concrete paving specified in Section 02523 including prepared subbase and base specified in Section 02231, striping and bumpers. �j+ ck- TOTAL UNIT PRICE #4: ;%,olti, Dollars/S.Y. 7 UNIT PRICE #5: f F 7 7 l .r Water line specked in Section 02665 including trenching, piping, backfill and testing. TOTAL UNIT PRICE #5: Sg-vu+� P—l&h►T Dollars/L.F. (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written 'Notice to Proceed' of the Owner and to fully complete the Training Tower, Bum House and Training Feld Paving and Training Feld Water Service Line included in Alternate numbers 1 and 4 (if accepted) within 270 consecutive calendar days and the entire project within 450 (FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $1,500.00 (ONE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty 130) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the drawings, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten 00) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S 1 or a Bid Bond in the sum of��i� Dollars ($ ), which It is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid Is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. '•- 3 7 7, r Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Sea[ if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date /b./ -9g Addenda No. Date /O-5`-4/- R Addenda No. Date /O-$ -Y 8 Addenda No.Date— d-E-2-18 Authorized Signature D.4vi/D / , (Printed or Typed Name) r Company 15-6-69/ 32 7 Address City, County og State Zip Code Telephone:- =6 Z70b Fax:- - 2r9 -5�77 2 I.C.W. GROUP 7INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST ❑EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY ❑INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 (619) 350-2400 - FAX (619) 350-2707 BOND NO. BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST , a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA , and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of TEXAS , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID -------------Dollars ($5% GAB ) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bounded Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated 10/14/98 for bid FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such r work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal or Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has- been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said principal and said Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this 14TH day of OCTOBER 1998. DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. BY: I SURANCE COMRANY THE ST BY: .11liAAA I-)-). ECCA S. THACKER r .. Insurance Company of the West HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO. CALIFORNIA t: POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a California Corporation, does hereby appoint REBECCA S. THACKER its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority, to execute, on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors on the 22nd day of November, 1994, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true copy: 'RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the Company, and each of them, is hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, or other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature; and to attach thereto the seal of the Company; provided however, that the absence of the seal shall not affect the validity of the instrument. FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company, and the signature's of any witnesses, the signatures and seat of any notary, and the signatures of any officers certifying the validity of the Power of Attorney, may be affixed by facsimile IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused these presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this 13th day of October 1997 . STATE OF CALIFORNIA SS. COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO .�``010"Ve. INSURANC CO PANY OF THE WEST i EMI 1. CV 65901 ohm L. Hannunf. Executive Vice President On October 13th, 1997 before me, personally appeared John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, personalty known to me to be the individual and officer who executed the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his official capacity and that by his signature on the instrument, the corporation, on behalf of which he acted, executed the instrument. WITNESS my hand and official seal. MARLAYNA DU BOIS rC;r't.l.-;10779CS n S� J C ;-%;0 COUNTY n tary Public py Comri:_Sion Expires CERTIFICATE: NOVEMBcR 19.19y9 1, John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which the foregoing is a true copy, is still in full force and effect and that this certificate may be signed by facsimile under the authority of the above quoted resolution. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have subscribed my name as Assistant Secretary, on this 14TH day of OCTOBER 19 gg ICW 37 i r., []_ &MUI -16M,L1 r BOND CHECK `' r BEST RATING ._ LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE - BY LC.W.GROUP [j]INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST .- ❑EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY QINDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY 11455 EL CAMINO REAL "_ SAN DIEGO, CA 92130-2045 ,.- P.O. BOX 85563, SAN DIEGO, CA 921W5563 (619) 350-2400 FAX (619) 350-2707 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE BOND NO. 156 46 78 (McGREGOR ACT - PUBLIC WORKS) r KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: rTbat DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and € M T E , a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA , with its principal office in the City of San Diego (hereinafter called the Surety), as 'Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK _ (hereinafter called the Obligee) inthe amount of ME §ikbi-----------------------=----------------- Dollar (S 4, 587 , 900 . od, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, 7administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obli ee, dated the 12TH day Df NOVE4BER *1998,toID# 98212 - FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX - $4,587,VN0 ( BAS�ANb ALTERNATES # 1, # 2 , AND # 6 which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. r NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the r"Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. r", IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 19TH day of NOVEMBER , 1998 7Witness: DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Seal) _ (Seal) (If Individual or Firm)�'L�/��W f (Seal) r- Surety - INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY & SURETY-.007N�AIyY (If Corporation) & INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST'� rSTEVE RICKENBACHER . Attornev-I&Fid . M .• Independence Casualty and Surety Company HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a Texas Corporation, does hereby appoint: STEVE RICKENBACHER its true and lawful Attorney(s)in-Fad, with full power and authority, to execute, on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors on the 22nd day of November, 1994, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true copy: "RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the Company, and each of them, is hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, or other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature; and to attach thereto the seal of the Company; provided however, that the absence of the seal shall not affect the validity of the instrument. -FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company, and the signatures of any witnesses, the signatures and seal of any notary, and the signatures of any officers certifying the validity of the Power of Attorney, may be affixed by facsimile IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its duty authorized officers this 21 st day of November 1997 . STATE OF CALIFORNIA SS. r• COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO �µsX Mo INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY aG AT O John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On November 21st, 1997 before me, personalty appeared John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President of INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, personalty known to me to be the Individual and officer who executed the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his official capacity and that by his signature on the instrument, the corporation, on behalf of which he acted, executed the instrument. WITNESS my hand and official seal. FRA is COMM.ft# F69060 A0 V ��C xn sion Exppinui r AUGUST 15,1999 CERTIFICATE: I, John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary of INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which the foregoing is a true copy, is still in full force and effect, and that this certificate may be signed by facsimile under the authority of the above quoted resolution. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have subscribed my name as Assistant Secretary, on this 19TH day of NOVEMBER j" 19 98 i v INDEPENDENC S ANDS _ COMPANY 4 r ICS 37 o n raig, Assists ry i lU ol;lMW It 4 -.161E4 C BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY ❑LC.W.GROUP ©INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST QEXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY ©INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY 11455 EL CAMINO REAL' SAN DIEGO, CA 92130-2045 P.O. BOX 85563, SAN DYECO, CA 92186-5563 (619) 350-2400 FAX (619) 350-2707 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE BOND No. 156 46 78 (McGREGOR ACT - PUBLIC WORKS) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That, 'DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and 'ThE5R9F COMPAN Y &, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA , with its principal office in the City of San Diego (hereinafter called the Surety), as Su rety, are held and firm!y bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of�'{�st�I�IrEF�'DIGHTY------SEVEN ------------- Dollars (S 4, 587.900.0C►, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their hens, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered MgMola kith the Obligee, dated the 12TH day Of NOVEMBER , 1998, tO 4 , yy, �300 . t 1, # 2 , AND # 6 ) which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF TTiIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and co©tract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 19THday Of NOVEMBER 01998 Witness: Attest: (If Individual or Firm) (If Corporation) DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Seal) (Se D/ALi ('Seal) Surety INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY & SURETY COMPANY., = & INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WET . Attomev-ln-Fact STEVE RICKENBACHER Insurance Company of the West HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a California Corporation, does hereby appoint: STEVE RICKENBACHER its true and lawful Attomey(s)4n-Fact, with full power and authority, to execute, on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature. This Power of Attorney Is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors on the 22nd day of November, 1994, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true copy: "RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the Company, and each of them, is hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, or other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature; and to attach thereto the seal of the Company; provided however, that the absence of the seal shall not affect the validity of the instrument FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company, and the signatures of any witnesses, the signatures and seal of any notary, and the signatures of any officers certifying the validity of the Power of Attorney, may be affixed by facsimile." IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused these presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this 21st day of November 1997 . �t,*yPµr'' �INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST t a l�pWORVto 4ftH 1, Cu STATE OF CALIFORNIA ohn L. Hannum, Executive Vice President SS. COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO On November 21 st, 1997 before me, personally appeared John L Hannum, Executive Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, personally known to me to be the individual and officer who executed the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his official capacity and that by his signature on the instrument, the corporation, on behalf of which he acted, executed the instrument WITNESS my hand and official seal. 41S FAFAUL li�T M 91 t>69060 c1' Lwww�_ ��'�F�rrion ii:xCERTIFICATE:�T 113,19� I, John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which the foregoing Is a true copy, is still in full force and effect, and that this certificate may be signed by facsimile under the authority of the above quoted resolution. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have subscribed my name as Assistant Secretary, on this 19TH • ICW 37 +4tra*P"0, a �.tAT��lp t r"1fi0Mi1' day of NOVEMBER 1998 THE WEST' M r i CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE r- 1 A A B A C I Fax:8067988777 Nov 30 '98 11:01 P.02 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: 11-30-98 P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION. INC. (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate. Insured by this Company with respect to the business operation_. hereinafter described. for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company. the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERALLLMUTY C&nem'Liaeutty EPA25679037 5-27-98 5-27-99 ce'+eralA test 000 000 3! Claims Made Pmducbs-CompK)p AGG � of � BD 11-16-98 11-16-99 J"�= ' � fOe=1 000 Fire Damage Why one ire 50 000 s , Mad Ex; (Any one Peraon) 5,000 s AUTOMOTIVEtfA81UTY IX Any Auto Cm um Stride Limit 61. 000, 000 Autos AA19437103 5-27-98 5-27-99 r3 Sc Au �y�ftnU s Hired Autos Propel Damage s Non -Owned Autos w GARAGE = 70ry a Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident S n Outer Dian Auto Only. Each Accident s AaaFLWt s 9( BUILDM S RISK ki 100%of the Tatar Contilld Price RR477104 5-27-98 5-27-99 _ U INSTAUATiONFLOATER s MW UAWLITY g( Untuaua Form ON67997677 5-27-98 5-27-99 Each O=wences c Other Than Umbrella Form S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND LPG � tor/ cc included rSFOO13125 5-29-98 5-29-99 statutayLimits Parmw fteci the c F.xdudett Each Aft S 1 000 000 officers are: Memo Policy U NI i l sewi-&c h En *ym $12UUU9VUU. OTHER Ilwww�w ■wwT-w.1�1 wllwrw T.I/./ r/11'1 I.TTV Ar 111nn^A1 w.1 nL. vau 7 7VL 1L-nuuiVl\nL 11\JVnLu 111t11-V 1 Vn Vi 1 1 VI LVVVVVn Vlt UL14LRML LIAO. MW NV 1 V LIAB. WITH WAIVER OF SUBROGATION INCLD FOR CITY OF LUBBOCK ON GENERAL LIAB. AND AUTO LIAB. AND fflKrAj COMA�I�S�T�ON e above pa <ctes er to ereof or by appropriate endoraernent provide that theyy may net be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than1he legal time required after the insured has received wnzten notice of such change or cancellation. or m case there is no legal requirement, to less than fire days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE A, B, C i MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK By: a0 Tdte:_ I r i CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity. prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period: a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; _ (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity In writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered,'and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements Imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both .English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 2 4 P^ REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and r (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: -: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the s ! project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; ... (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and +" (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; r (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 7 No Text r FCONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 12th day of November, 1998 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and David Wood Construction of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements r described as follows: r r E I BID #98212 - FIRE ADMINISTRATION COMPLEX - $4,587,900.00 (Base Bid and Alternates #1, #2, and #6) and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to fumish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. 116 Z' W.WrlijwMr,ILPU� k _ APPROVED 4 TO • /11 Itt4,41" APPROVED AS TO FORM: .v - 4 A-0-4, City Attorney ATTEST: Corporate Secrets r MA- •- , Wi',k1 U4&fCA DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. By: z PRINTED NAME:tJ//Q 4,O696 TITLE:_ Z6%�N COMPLETE ADDRESS: David Wood Construction, Inc. 5501 Spur 327 Lubbock,Texas 79424 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r MR GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, f � K 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. r., 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. who has agreed to perform the work " embraced in this contract, or their legal representative, 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 7 Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. I 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS k The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed f _ Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the [ Agreement (if any), Specifications; Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes r referred to herein as the "contract" or °contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES r Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," r - "Acceptable," "Satisfactory,"- or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the I Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR i The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member r• of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its Intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep -one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed worts and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract -- documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. _ 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY r Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority r... to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The r Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection ,., by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials fumished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is fumished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall fumish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate ° supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. r7 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and �., location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be f encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or r Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. I 3 Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such - structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public -- observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be bome by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 4 d i Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make"such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classed under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 4" 24. EXTRA WORK t The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. T In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph ' shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership ._ Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." _ No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making _ written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums In Its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It Is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT _ If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall ^— comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specked, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 6 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attomeys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors, 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations In connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or In the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular t project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. I : A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability insurance with limits of $1,000.000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations FExplosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard 6"" 7 Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single — Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.0 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability -- coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing 'statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. _ Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with _ the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to _ 8 i provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a #04 project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage i Ivendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and t payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. j 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and r for one year thereafter. z ? 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially �. affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification. codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; r' (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: �' 9 (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and — (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for _ whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance — carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. — (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 10 owl (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the t current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; �• (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially ` affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: A REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation Insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the — project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive Information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this — contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate Insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -Insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, — civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the -- project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(vlii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of (,.. 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS. LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES �•. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, matedalmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five r` (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such .., indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION r" The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. F13 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the -- Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors .— perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. .� 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this '— contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. — If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $1,500.00 LONE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 14 It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. r' 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors r employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days {. of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. r 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS �., In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such t work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for r hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the r„ specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material i to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing r- their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be fumished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 15 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application; the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if '- submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that maybe retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. r 45. CORRECTION OF WORK t Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative �... on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and i Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, } Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. r r-� 17 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. — Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no _ further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for _ under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice — hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or — otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain — bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. 18 _ In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, PM shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, +^ Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds 4 $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved ' Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 19 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which maybe encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to cant' out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and -- vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. _ 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. _ 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the _ Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If _ the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (1) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS r„ Resolution No. 5121 j March 14, 1996 Item #19 i, RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's 1. Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and i WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8. 1987; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Exhibit C. Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. E 11 — �I Passed by the Cite Council this 14th da rch 1996. , ff � - i AVID R. LA Iv STON, VYOR —i f ATTEST: IIli I I Betty M. Anson, City Secretary i APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: I�I Mary AndrVws, Managing Director of ' Human Resources — APPROVED AS TO FORM: I� i a old Willard, Assistant City Attorney — ?' HWAa/ccdocs/Pubworks.res 1 February 14. 1996 I� ^I f� 1' i I i i . f i I � I� EXEIIBTT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates 7 11 Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Iastilator-PipingB oiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 10.00 11.00 5.50 8.00 11.00 11.00 6.00 11.00 6.00 7.50 10.00 13.00 6.00 8.50 7.50 8.50 8.00 9.00 5.50 8.00 5.50 5.50 9.50 10.50 6.00 8.00 5.50 8.75 5.50 10.00 EXMBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 6.00 Asphalt Shoveler 5.50 Concrete Finisher 7.35 Concrete Finisher -Helper 5.75 Electrician 10.50 Egger 5.50 Form Setter 6.50 Form Setter -Helper 5.50 Laborer -General 5.50 Laborer -Utility 6.25 Mechanic 7.25 Mechanic -Helper 5.50 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.00 Bulldozer 7.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.00 Front End Loader 6.50 Heavy Equipment Operator 7.00 Light Equipment Operator 6.50 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.00 Scraper 6.50 Tractor 6.50 Truck Driver -Light 6.00 Truck Driver -Heavy 6.50 EXMBrrC Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 112 times base rate. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. [.�::: ir. � i�...:: L� tr::.� � L=:. ��; : L.-- �--- t� l�: t _....:: � ir..: L._; � t__: i._..� i� FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 SECTION 00200 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 INFORMATION A. Geotechnical Data 1. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, and these investigations were made by: Terra Engineers, Inc. 5208 34`" Street Lubbock, Texas 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 2. Logs of test borings are bound at the end of this Section. 3. Log of borings is available for Contractor's information but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. 4. Entire report is available for Bidder's review at Architect's office. B. Property Survey 1. A survey of the property was authorized by the Owner, and the survey was made by: Robert L. Smith Surveying P.O. Box 93616 Lubbock, Texas 79493 (806) 765-9543 2. Site layout, drawings and boundary traverse and closure information are included in the drawings. 3. Property survey and site improvement layout is available for Contractor's information only and is not a warranty of existing conditions. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the Roof Survey Report and then determine for themselves the validity of the information contained there -in as it relates to this project. B. Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations of roof condition or recommendations made in the report. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03860396/98 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 00200 - 1 r j. -? Y 0 60� 1R0� TI-`" UR5UL.INc- m STR 1329 1/9/98 No. of blows per foot (N) 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 -, - I ___ - __ - ___ I __ - - MMMMMM MM MMIMIMMM MM oBH #1 M IM PM :x8H #2 5 &8H #3 Mo 10 MMM' WE P ME 1 M 13MM MMMMMM ROMMM M (D 42) MMMMM MMM-_ MMMM .a 15 (D 0 20 CL (D 0 MMM COLOM W M 25 M MMM"MMM MMM1MMMM=M1M I M 0 - I EEEN M M MM I ma M 35.1 MMMMMM1MMMMM Note: An arrow indicates N Is greater than 50 blows. Figure 2 Standard Penetration Test ASTM D-1 586 Method of Sampling: ASTM D-1 586, Split -Barrel Sampler Size of Sampler: 2-in Method of Drilling: Wet -_ Dry 2L Method of Advancing Sampler: 140 lb. Hammer, 30-in. drop TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. f I v- I i a 'f 10 I; 1s Witt. 1 20 r {, 25 30 4 35 40 ' 4r, 1 45 50. BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 1 Project: Location: Date Of Dr@�: FhY Trainin and Ad�otstrutfoa F mx Btvd. And Ursutine Ave. 014 )&99 CJhat: Depth of GWT: Pamum Smith & Coo Inc. � Sa i= Elevation: Dlaarder Depth: Borias Method: SI'R giro iJdarown 7 7ir 20' HSA 1329 Depf1R Q Description USC 1No�rvn W� t't.rtie 7 t:P r. No. of Bbsn Per P p; Coateat,SL Umtf.l4 IJrrlt, fi Lie: P2t� ui 1st IM 3rd '1'S Silty Sand wlorganics, Dark Reddish SM 7.7 Non- Plastic 30.9 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 11.8 9 7 5 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 11.1 33 13 20 56.8 4 5 5 Lean Clay, Strong Brawn I CL 1 12.6 layey Sand whrace of caliche, ellowish Red 37 5 1 12 1 17 46.8 1 8 1 14 1 21 71MW Sand,Red SC I3.5 7 I0 I3 TERRA ENGINEERS. INC. BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 2 Project: Locatku: Dane ofDrU t: Flre Trah to and Adminb vdon F MLIC Btrd. And UnWke Ave 01.06-98 r. Ctknt: Depth of GwT: �T Pa,rkhM SmM & Cooper, Inc. Smrfm El %mdom Diameter. DepW Borlmt We": STR Ne.: Unlmolra 7 7B" 1 20. HSA M9 ^ Lt USC M06hre "I" Pbluc PhRklty Pa*dq I SPT. No et alma 3er Q' Ramat Cootmt, % Lhw% % UMK % k+da 0 200, % iR :kW 3rd ITS .1. Silty Sand w/organics, Dark Reddish SM 7.8 Timm Sandy Dean Clay w/caliche, Pink CL 15.5 25 17 8 62.4 15 10 10 Sandy Lean Clay; w/trace of caliche, CL 14.8 3 4 7 Reddish Yellow Sandy lean Clay w/tracc of calichc, CL 15.7 34 16 18 56.3 5 8 14 Reddish Yellow IS Sandy Leas Clay w/trace of caliche, CL 20.0 5 12 18 Sand Wftuc of caliche, Sc 15.0 38 17 21 36.8 9 14 20 • 1' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 �,1 f.� • 45 50 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC 000 Dep& ofCw'f: &Wtb&Goo Iuc FJevdim- Diameter: kra: Boriar MeM": SM Fo.: lix" no HSA } ID—c fjpF[ = Mai -re L"Wd P/-W FURRY tea[ I wr-mw eirmem Pori I Ceatmt, % L edt. % I lbok % Lde: 1 @200.%l lit Ind 7d Silty Sand w/organics, Dark Reddish SM 9.6 Sandy Lean Clay w/trace of caliche, CL 13.0 5 6 6 Reddish Yellow Clayey Sand whrace of caliche, Strong SC 12.7 33 14 19 48.4 2 2 2 10 Clayey Sand w/trace of caliche, Strong SC 13.3 10 12 1 19 Brown is Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 14.8 36 18 18 36.5 6 12 1 15 so TERRA ENGINEERS. INC. ATTACHMENT-1 Project: Fire Administrationrl'raining Facility, Lubbock ProjectlSTR #: Client: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Invoice #: Test Hole #: 1 Sample Number: Location of Sample: NA Date of Sample: Depth of Sample: 0.9 - 2.0 ft Date of Test: Description of soil: Dark reddish brown silty sand Tested by: 600 500 400 a 300 J 200 100 0 California Bearing Ratio (CBR), ASTM D-1883 1329 19716 3332 1 /6/98 1 /8/98 Mark —7— --- i T- 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 Penetration, in Quality Review/Date FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.p 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents.p B. Work by Owner.p C. Owner furnished products.p D. Contractor use of site.p E. Future work.p F. Work Sequence.p G. Owner occupancy.p 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Location: Northwest corner of the intersection of Martin Luther King Boulevard and Ursuline Street in the City of Lubbock, Lubbock County Texas.p B. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description of the Project is as follows::p 1. The Fire Department Complex is a 58,624 square foot facility consisting of a 26,401 sq. ft. Facility that contains Fire Station No. 2, Fire Training, Fire Administration and the Fire Martshal's Offices, a 19,528 sq. ft. Facility that contains Vehicle Maintenance, Vehicle Storage and Supply Issue, a 1,192 sq. ft. Burn House and a seven story Fire Training tower. 2. The project also includes site development as indicated on the drawings. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award contracts which will commence at an undetermined time after the start of construction on this project. Work under these contracts will include:p 1. Audio Visual Equipment: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing video equipment in AV Library 125, Auditorium 129, AV Projection 132, AV Production 133, Classrooms 134 and 135 and Recruit Classroom 136. 2. Telephone System: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing of a telephone network system. 3. Landscaping and Landscaping Irrigation: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing all landscaping and landscaping irrigation. B. The Owner, with its own forces, will install the 12 inch diameter main water line and 6 inch main sewer line and manholes. This work may or may not be completed before start of work of this project.p C. Items noted 'NIC' (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner as required to meet the occupancy schedule. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS 03860396/98 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 `^ FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner:p 1. Residential appliances not scheduled nor specified to be furnished as part of this project. B. Owner's Responsibilities:p 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. r. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities:p 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. .- 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow:p `} 1. Work by Others and Work by Owner. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas indicated on drawings to be constructed. p 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases to accommodate Owner's requirements to occupy the Training Tower, Burn House and Training Field lundeveloped area from the Training Tower North) prior to completion of remainder of project.p B. During the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect:p _1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY , A. The Owner will occupy the Training Field lundeveloped area from the Training Tower r North) as soon as the Training Tower and Burn House are complete, for installation of training projects.p B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations.p C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement.p PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03860396/98 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 2 fill f FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. D. Measurement and payment - unit prices. E. Alternates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Specification. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. D. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit [three] copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES p A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to r.. Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as described in the General Conditions of the ellAgreement. By issuing Architect's Supplemental Instruction form. `' B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, el. 03860396/98 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 1 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Cost Determination: As defined in Article 24 - EXTRA WORK of the General Conditions of the Agreement. E. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. F. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections. B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and quantities. C. Unit Quantities: quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided will determine payment. ` D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. E. Defect Assessment: Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. F. Unit Price Schedule: As indicated in the Bid Submittal. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates 1. Alternate No. 1: Training field paving, including subbase, base and curb and gutter. Under Alternate No. 4, add grading and preparation of subbase, aggregate base course, asphaltic concrete paving, concrete curbs, gutters and drainage valley in the Training Field area as indicated on the drawings. ` 2. Alternate No. 2: Additional metal lockers. Under Alternate No. 2, provide 12 additional expanded metal lockers in Apparatus Bay Al 18 as specified in Section10500 - METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS and as indicated on the drawings. G 3. Alternate No. 3: Concrete sidewalks. Under Alternate No. 3, add concrete sidewalks flush with the back of the curb along the property lines commom with East Ursuline Street and Martin Luther King, Jr. Boulevard. 4. Alternate No. 4: Training field water service line. Under Alternate No. 4, add providing the 6 inch Training Field water line including all ditching, piping, valves, fittings, siamese connections, backfill and testing all as specified in Section 02665 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS. 5. Alternate No. 5: Thermoplastic single -ply membrane roofing. _ Under Alternate No. 5, provide the thermoplastic single -ply membrane roofing as specified in Section 07533 in lieu of the modified bitumen roofing specified in Section 07536. 6. Alternate No. 6: Fixed lecture tables. Under Alternate No. 6, add providing the fixed lecture tables as specified in Section 12630 - FIXED LECTURE TABLES. 03860396/98 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 2 M FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION i Not Used h 1 END OF SECTION Ai T 1l t try -R 03860396/98 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 900-9330 01019 - 3 r� k 9 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9303 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Cutting and patching. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. r^ 03860396/98 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. B. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. C. Verify set -backs and easements, confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. D. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. E. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. t 2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 3. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements.' C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Survey and building layout. e. Security and housekeeping procedures. f. Schedules. g. Procedures for testing. h. Procedures for maintaining record documents. i. Requirements for start-up of equipment. j. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum [monthly] [bi-monthly] [weekly] intervals. B. [Make] [Architect will make] [Engineer will make] arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, [Architect,] [Engineer,] as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 03860396/98 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 2 i i� t FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. �., E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within five days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify- Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants, with four copies to Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning" new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. t" B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 03860396/98 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 3 1 J FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION r r- 03860396/98 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 4 i r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9303 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship duties and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60601 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209 ` AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AIA American Institute of Architects t 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 " ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. _ Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811 Sherman Oaks, CA 91403 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2 _ V V FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX ,mac ASTM American Society for Testing and Udifetials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive ` Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 Grandbury, TX 76049-7979 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association \° 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 f BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturer Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 511 New York, NY 10165 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive i Reston, VA 22091 CDA Copper Development Association 57th Floor, Chrysler Building f 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CFR Code of Federal Regulations a North Capitol Street between G & H Streets, NW Washington, DC 20402 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. �-• Washington, DC 20036 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1111 Eighteenth Street, NW F, s a Washington, DC 20207 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 f 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 900-9303 01090 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 DOT Department of Ttansportation 400 Seventh Street, SW Washington, DC 20590 EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 EPA Environmental Protection Agency _ 401 M Street, SW Washington, DC 20460 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M Street, NW Washington, DC 20554 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison r White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 FM Factory Mutual System ` 1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062 --- FS Federal Specification General Services Administration _ Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 810 First St. NE, Suite 510 �— Washington, DC 20002 NPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association 1825 Michael Faraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 HPW N.P. White Laboratory 3114 Scarboro Road Street, MD 21154 Reston, VA 22090-2789 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IES Illumination Engineering Society of North America 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ISWA Insect Screen Weavers Association P.O. Box 1018 Ossining NY 10562 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 MIL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue Bethesda, MD 20814 900-9303 r-+ 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 5 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 'L' Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037 - NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFoPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38135 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 3475 Plymouth Road P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 47106 NWWDA National Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association 205 W. Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 RIS Redwood Inspection Service One Lombard Street San Francisco, CA 94111 RMA Rubber Manufacturer's Association 1400 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 900-9303 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 6 4r i k FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 = SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road r- Vienna, VA 22180 R 1 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council r 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varns Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 8361 A Greensboro Drive McLean, VA 22102 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1 " 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 H W.W.P.A.Woven Wire Products Association 2515 N. Nordica Avenue Chicago, IL 60635 «,,, 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 900-9303 03860396/98 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 8 k FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 900-9303 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. I. Construction photographs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Test Reports. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to architect's at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. I. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 03860396/98 SUBMITTALS 01300 1 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 900-9303 A. Revise initial submittal as required and resubmit to meet requirements as specified. ._ B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical suffix for each re -submittal. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. C. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. D. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. E. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. F. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner. _ 1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible ._ transparency and one opaque reproduction. B. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus four copies which will be retained by Architect. C. Drawing size shall be minimum 8% x 11 inches and maximum of 30 x 42 inches. D. Details shall be drawn to a minimum size of 1'/2 inches equal to 1 foot. E. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record document purposes described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus four copies which will be retained by the Architect. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. D. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work. E. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. ,.. 03860396/98 SUBMITTALS 01300 2 .._ FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX t� ' 1.10 SAMPLES 900-9303 A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors, textures, and patterns, as specified and as scheduled for Architect's selection. C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Each month submit photographs to Architect with Application for Payment. B. Photographs: Two prints; color, matte; 3 x 5 inch size. C. Take two site photographs from differing directions and five interior photographs of each separate building indicating the relative progress of the Work, 5 days maximum prior to submitting. D. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and project identification. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION { r:. 03860396/98 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 t FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 900-9303 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selection and payment. B. Contractor submittals. C. Laboratory responsibilities. D. Laboratory reports. E. Limits on testing laboratory authority. F. Contractor responsibilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00200 - Information Available to Bidders: Soil Investigation and Survey Data. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates. C. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems and Section 15600: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. E. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.5 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740R. B. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 03860396/98 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 900-9303 A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 1.8 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by. Architect. G. Attend preconstruction conferences and progress meetings. 1.9 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit three copies of laboratory report to Architect, and to Contractor. B. Include: 1. Date issued, 2. Project title and number, 3. Name of inspector, 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection, 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section, 6. Location in the Project, 7. Type of inspection or test, S. Date of test, 9. Results of tests and 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. C. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. 1.10 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.11 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. 03860396/98 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 E. Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory, arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 1.12 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. As indicated in individual Specification Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 03860396/98 END OF SECTION TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 rr SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source. B. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. C. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting for construction operations. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets served by single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide flexible power cords as required. 3. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. too„ B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. 03860396/98 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. D. Do not use permanent building heating equipment until all dust related operations are completed. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases... 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. B. Permanent building facilities shall not be used during construction operations. 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of the site, and to protect adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public rights -of -way. r C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian -- gates with locks. 1.13 WATER CONTROL _ A. Grade to site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary 03860396/98 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.16 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.17 ACCESS ROADS A. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve construction area. B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 1.18 PARKING A. Construct temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 1.19 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.20 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 8 w x 6 h foot project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter, to Architect's design and colors. B. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, professional sub -consultants, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. C. Erect on site at location established by Architect. D. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. r 03860396/98 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.21 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather -tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30 feet from new structures. 1.22 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean -and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 PRODUCTS Not used END OF SECTION 03860396/98 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9303 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Product quality monitoring. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 03860396/98 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment stored in off -site storage facilities may not be included in progress pay requests. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. _ C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date — established in Notice to Proceed. A. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required _ for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. — E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results' attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART PRODUCTS Not Used 03860396/98 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 i r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION t' ti .i i( �i l tr t 03860396/98 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 900-9303 01600 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9303 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01410 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 03860396/98 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION r- 03860396/98 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 r A e FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 03860396/98 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 03860396/98 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 i i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303 I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. r C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03860396/98 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 r r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Removal of surface debris. C. Topsoil stripping. D. Clearing and grubbing. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Stormwater Discharge 1. Prepare and submit a Notice of Intent (NOD for Stormwater Discharge to United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) not less than 2 days prior to initiating any clearing or grading of the site. 2. Post NOI form in view, at site, at all times. B. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) 1. Prepare, implement and document implementation of a SWPPP in accordance with provisions set forth in regulations published in September 16, 1992 issue of Federal Register pertaining to Final NPDES Permits for Discharge to Construction Sites. 2. Strictly adhere to SWPPP. 3. Certify plan prior to all clearing or grading. C. Conform to applicable Texas Department of Health code for disposal of debris. D. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct site -clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 EXISTING SERVICES A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing Work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. 03860396/98 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Locate, identify, and protect from damage utilities that remain. B. Protect trees, plant growth and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks from damage or displacement. 3.3 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar _ items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off -site disposal of stumps and roots. 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other - objectionable material 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade _ improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02110 03860396/98 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage and moisture -control fill course for slabs -on -grade. 4. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 6. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off -site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. D. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense. E. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. F. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following: 1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backf ill from on -site and borrow sources. 2. One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each soil material. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. r„y 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Testing and Inspection Service: Employ a qualified independent geotechnical ` engineering testing agency to classify proposed on -site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. — 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum 48-hours' notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. B. Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available in the Architect's office for information only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents. Opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for _ interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off -site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, _ SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter and a plasticity index or 15 or less. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. D. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, Ph range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials _ harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to provide topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. _ Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. F. Sand: Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index 8 or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 OR .' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 �^ C. Provide erosion control measures td' prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 03660396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 s FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. When Architect determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including,where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 �., 1. Carefully ,compact material under, pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on 1 both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. D. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil i materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so r� fill material will bond with existing surface. B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture - condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density. C. After stripping and before placing structural fill, the exposed subgrade should be proof - rolled to detect any soft or wet areas requiring remediation. Proof -rolling of the r.. subgrade should be performed with a heavy rubber -tire vehicle such as a pneumatic - tire roller or a loaded dump truck. If encountered, soft, wet or loose soils should be undercut and replaced with compacted backfill having similar classification, moisture and density as adjacent competent in situ soils. The stripping and proof -rolling should be witnessed by the soil engineers, or their representative. D. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory fill material with sand at the top 2 inches immediately below the slab. Sand shall be damp and compacted prior to placing 1 fresh concrete. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 3.15 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. 7 C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698: 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 r, FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Walks: Plus or minus 1.2 inches. 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1 /2 inch. C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1 /2 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. D. Areas outside the building lines from which topsoil has been removed shall be topsoiled. The surface shall be free of materials that would hinder planting or maintenance operations. The subgrade shall be pulverized to a depth of 2 inches by disking or plowing for the bonding of topsoil with the subsoil. Topsoil shall then be uniformly spread, graded, and compacted to the thickness, elevations, slopes shown, and left free of surface irregularities. Topsoil shall be compacted by one pass of a cultipacker, roller, or other approved equipment weighing 100 to 160 pounds per linear foot of roller. Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding, planting, or proper grading. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in -place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in -place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. b. When field in -place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 2. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in -place density test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 3. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in -place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 I_ f, FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 4. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in -place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. �^ B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified I density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 r. 03860396/98 EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 02231 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART 1 GENERAL t 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Subgrade preparation. B. Aggregate Base Course. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Compacted backfill under -base course. 02513 Paving: finish B. Section - Asphaltic Concrete Base Course for paving. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M147-65-Materials for Aggregate and Soil Aggregate. B. Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT)- Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. ' B. Test certificates from an approved commercial laboratory shall be furnished on materials by this section 30 days prior to construction. rcovered i 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing shall be by standard AASHTO methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Subgrade: Native material free of clay, organic or deleterious material. B. Base Course: 1. Crusher Run Stone and Binding Material a. Material shall be free of all soil, clay, and other objectionable materials. b. Conformance: TXDOT, Item 247, FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE, Paragraphs 247.2(2)(a) and 247.2(2)(d), Type C, Grade 2. 03860396/98 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02231 -1 r 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify Subgrade has been inspected, Gradients and elevations are correct and surface is dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Maintain and protect utilities which pass through work area. B. Protect bench marks, fences, sidewalks and curbs from construction equipment and vehicular traffic. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Subgrade _ 1. Any clay encountered within 2 feet of the pavement surface grade shall be removed from project site and replaced with suitable material 2. After subgrade has been shaped and graded to elevation shown on the plans, the top 6 inches shall be prepared as a subgrade for the base course as specified herein. The top 6 inches shall be scarified, plowed or otherwise loosened; shall be wetted, shaped and rolled with approved rollers. 3. When the required compaction is achieved, the subgrade shall be finished to the line and grades as shown on the plans or as directed by the Contracting Officer. 4. The subgrade shall be kept in good condition as required and shall be safe for traffic until such time as the base course is constructed. Periodic wetting of the _ subgrade will be required to maintain density and to keep down dust from traffic. B. Base Course: Construction methods shall be in accordance with TXDOT, Part II Construction Details, Division II, Subbase and Base Courses, Items 204, 211, 214, and 216. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Subgrade 1. Scheduled compacted thickness: Within 1 /4 inch. 2. Variation from true elevation: Within 1 /2 inch. B. Base Course ` 1. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1 /4 inch as measured with a 16 foot straight edge. 2. Scheduled compacted thickness: Within 1 /4 inch. 3. Variation from true elevation: Within 1 /2 inch. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field density testing for subgrade and base course will be performed at a minimum of one density per 500 square yards. B. Work not meeting specified requirements shall.be reworked and retested at no cost to ` the Owner. 03860396/98 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02231 -2 ,_ FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.6 SCHEDULE A. New Parking Areas and Roadways: 1. Subgrade: 6 inch, 95% density, ASTMD-1557. 2. Base: 6 inch, 98% density, ASTMD-1557. END OF SECTION 900-9330 03860396/98 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02231 - 3 d LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 02280 p SOIL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL l 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General J Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new construction. B. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Title 7, United States Code 136 through 136y -- Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act as amended; 1947 (Revised 1988). 1.4 SUBMITTALS i; A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under �^ applicable state and local law. t 2. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents: r" a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has been applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in accordance with this specification. b. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of application and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity. 2. Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE i A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Licensed to install specified products in the state in which the project is located r and in the local jurisdiction. t 2. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located. a. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations. 03860396/98 SOIL TREATMENT 02280-1 r- r i LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas. 2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following: 1. Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITICIDE _ A. Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to be treated and methods of treatment used. C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated. D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction. 3.2 CLEANING A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur. B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressure -preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non -pressure -preservative treated wood to contact with or remain proximate to soil. END OF SECTION 02280 03860396/98 SOIL TREATMENT 02280-2 t, FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 I F SECTION 02466 DRILLED PIERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place concrete drilled piers. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "UNIT PRICES" for a schedule of unit prices. 2. Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Basis of Bids: Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers; design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, extended through the bell, if applicable; and diameter of shaft and bell. B. Basis for Payment: Payment for drilled piers will be made on actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. The actual length, shaft diameter, and bell diameter, if applicable, may vary to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts and bells. 1. No additional compensation will be made for excavation, concrete fill, reinforcement, casings, or other costs due to unauthorized overexcavating of shafts or bells. 2. No payment will be made for rejected work. 3. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, and other items for a complete drilled -pier installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing drilled piers similar to those required for this Project. B. Drilled -Pier Standard: Comply with provisions of ACI 336.1, "Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers," unless modified in this Section. 1. The slurry displacement method of installation will not be permitted. C. Survey Work: Engage a registered surveyor or licensed professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required before excavation and record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports. 03860396/98 DRILLED PIERS 02466 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled -pier operations. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in '— operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. B. Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents. -- Opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled - pier operations. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to bearing elevations regardless of character of materials or obstructions encountered. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation includes removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. B. Dewatering: Prevent surface and ground water from entering excavated shafts. Dewater excavated shafts before concreting. Conduct water to site drainage facilities. C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. .- 1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane. 2. Remove loose material and water from bottom of excavation. D. Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle _ indicated. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before concrete is placed. E. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within the following tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Location: Not more than the lesser of 4.2 percent of ' pier diameter or 3 inches from design center location. 2. Out -of -Plumb: Not more than 12.5 percent of pier diameter. 3. Out -of -Plumb: Not more than 1.5 percent of pier length. _ 4. Out -of -Plumb: Not more than 2 percent of pier length. 5. Concrete Cutoff Elevation: Plus 1 inch, minus 3 inches. 6. Bottom Area of Pier: Not less than 96 percent of pier area required. 03860396/98 DRILLED PIERS 02466 - 2 n FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 7. Shaft Diameter: Not less than 98, percent or more than 110 percent of shaft l diameter indicated. l F. If location or out -of -plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement. F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather. l 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT l A. Place concrete in a continuous 'operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of the shaft by an independent testing and inspecting agency. B. Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, elephant - trunk hopper, or tremie. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of �•. more than 25 feet is required, or pump concrete into place. C. Place concrete in a dry shaft, unless placement underwater or by slurry displacement is approved by Architect. 1. Place concrete in slurry -filled shafts or underwater by tremie method or pumping. Control placement operations to ensure tremie is embedded no less than 60 k inches into concrete, and the flow of tremied concrete is continuous from bottom to top of drilled pier. 2. Other methods of depositing concrete may be used, if approved by Architect. D. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to maintain a head of concrete no less than 60 inches above casing bottom. E. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply a scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. F. Construct a cold joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level top surface of concrete and insert joint dowel bars. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush with a commercial bonding agent or with a sand -cement grout mixed at the ratio of 1:1. G. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place r concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral -containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators. H. When hot -weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of r" concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete without exceeding 90 deg F. 03860396/98 DRILLED PIERS 02466 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1. Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means for a minimum of 7 days. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Remove surplus excavated material and slurry and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02466 03860396/98 DRILLED PIERS 02466 - 4 7 i 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r E, f PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - rGeneral Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphaltic concrete base and pavement. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Compacted trench backfill for subbase for paving. B. Section 02231 - Flexible Base Course: Subgrade and Base Course for paving. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint for pavement markings. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Paving: Designed for main street arteries and parking. 1.5 REFERENCES A. "Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 1993 edition, Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation," referred to herein as Tex-SDHPT Spec. B. The Asphalt Institute -Manual MS-4. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Tex-SDHPT Spec and The Asphalt Institute Manual MS-4. B. Source Quality Control 1. Source of asphaltic materials shall not be changed during the course of the project except on written permission. C. Material Tests 1. Preconstruction tests of materials shall be required on all items specified herein including aggregate sieve analysis and soil constants. 2. Tests shall not be made more than 30 days prior to beginning of operations and the approval shall be secured before the materials are ordered to be shipped. 3. Additional test certificates shall be furnished on all materials and mix design if the material source is changed or if construction tests indicate marked variations from the original tests. If tests reveal that the item tested does not meet the requirements set forth in the specifications, retests shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 03860396/98 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 1 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Materials 1. Source: Notify Architect in writing of the source of asphaltic mixture. 2. Aggregate sieve analysis and soil constants. B. Mix Design 1. Four copies of a mix design from an approved commercial laboratory or other approved source for Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete. C. Certificates 1. Test certificates from an approved commercial laboratory or other approved source — shall be furnished on all materials proposed for use in this work. 2. Additional test certificates shall be furnished on all materials and mix design if the material source is changed or if construction tests indicate marked variations from _ the original tests. D. Field test reports required in Paragraph 3.5. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place asphaltic materials, when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees or when the surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Flexible Base Course and Subgrade: As specified in Section 02231, Aggregate Base Course. B. Asphaltic Mixture 1. Conformance: A.S.S.H.O. Specifications AC-20 2. Penetration: Between 85 and 150. 3. Grade: Designated after design tests have been made using the material aggregate that are to be used in the project. C. Tack Coat: Meet the requirements for cationic emulsions, slow setting CSS-Ih, 75% asphaltic material to 25% water. D. Prime Coat: Meet the requirements of cationic emulsion, slow setting, CSS-1 h, 5-10% asphaltic material to 90-95% water. —' E. Mineral Aggregate 1. In conformance with Tex-SDHPT Spec., Item 340, Para. 340.2, Materials, (1), (1) (a) Course Aggregate, (1) (c) Fine Aggregate, (1) (d) Mineral Filler. F. Precast Parking Bumpers: In accordance with details on drawings and with Section 03300 Concrete, including steel rod anchors. G. Pavement Paint: As specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIX A. The paving mixture shall conform to Tex-SDHPT Spec., Item 340, para. 340.3, Paving Mixtures,.Table 2 (Type C and D). 03860396/98 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that compacted granular base is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify grades and elevations of the finished subgrade and base! course are correct. C. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Structures: Protect surfaces of inlets and manholes from the application of tack coat. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Prime Coat: Prime coat shall be applied to the finished aggregate base course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.25 gallon per square yard. Actual application rate shall be determined in the field by the Architect. B. Tack Coat: 1. Tack coat shall be applied to the existing pavement to be overlaid at a rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard. Actual application rate shall be determined in the field by Architect. Pavement to be overlaid shall be swept clean of all foreign matter before application of tack coat. 2. Protect surfaces of inlets, valve boxes and manholes from the application of tack coat. Do not apply tack coat to these surfaces. 3. Apply Tack Coat to edges of adjacent pavement, concrete curbs, and inlets. C. Asphaltic Concrete 1. Place Asphaltic Concrete within 24 hours of application of Tack Coat. 2. Place to 2 inch compacted thickness. 3. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. 4. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. 5. Stockpiling, storage, proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with Tex- SDHPT-Spec. Item 340, para. 340.5 Stockpiling, Storage, and Mixing, (1), (2), (3) and (4). D. Parking Bumpers 1. Install precast concrete parking bumpers and secure with steel rods. E. Pavement Paint 1. Apply pavement paint as shown on the drawings as follows: a. parking spaces. b. no -parking zones. C. handicap parking spaces. 2. The Contractor shall use a crew experienced in the work of installing pavement markings and in the necessary traffic control for such operations on the pavement surface and shall supply all the equipment, personnel, traffic control, and materials necessary for the placement of the pavement markings as shown on the plans or as directed by the Architect. 3. The pavement surfaces to receive the pavement markings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, organic growth, or other material that will prevent adhesion of the paint to the pavement surface. 03860396/98 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 4. The pavement markings shall be placed in the proper 'alignment with guides established on the roadway. Deviation from the alignment established shall not exceed two inches nor shall any deviation be abrupt. 5. When deemed necessary by Architect, place any additional pilot markings required to facilitate placement of permanent markings in alignment specified. Any and all additional markings placed on pavement for alignment purposes shall be temporary in nature and shall not establish a permanent marking on pavement. 6. Materials used for pilot markings and equipment used to place such markings shall be approved by the Architect. 7. Paint markings on the pavement that are not in alignment or sequence, as shown on the plans or as stated in this specification, shall be totally and completely removed by any effective method approved by the Architect except that grinding will not be permitted. 8. Paint shall be applied at a rate of not less than 15 gallons nor more than 20 gallons per mile of solid four -inch stripe. (These rates yield wet film thicknesses from 15 to 20 mils). 9. Applied markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried sufficiently so as not to be damaged or tracked by normal traffic movements. 10. Equipment: The equipment shall be capable of placing lines of all widths with clean edges and of uniform cross-section. Four -inch lines shall be four inches plus or minus 118 inch. 11. The equipment shall be equipped with an outrigger or outriggers as required to place edgelines as called for in the plans. 12. Paint pots or tanks shall be equipped with an agitator that will keep the paint thoroughly mixed and may be either a pressurized or non -pressurized type. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. After the completion of placement of the wearing course, all debris resulting from the construction shall be cleaned up and removed from the site of the work. B. Areas which have been disturbed during the construction, shall be raked or graded as required and left in a clean and neat condition. C. Gutters shall be cleaned of all dirt, aggregate, or other materials which would clog the gutter. D. The entire premises of the work shall be left in a clean condition satisfactory to the Architect, and all costs of a cleanup shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The surface course as shown on the plans shall be composed of a compacted mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material. The mixture produced should have the following laboratory density and stability: Density. Percent Min. Max. Optimum 94 99 97 Stability, Percent Not less than 35, unless otherwise shown on plans. This pavement shall be constructed on the previously completed and approved subgrade and base, as herein specified and in accordance with the details shown on the plans. B. Thickness: Core samples will be taken to determine thickness as determined by the Architect. 03860396/98 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Compaction: Density tests will be performed at a rate of 1 test per 1,000 square yards. D. Tolerances 1. Surface Tests: The finished pavement surface shall be smooth and true to the established line grade and cross section. 2. When tested with a 16 foot straight edge placed parallel to the centerline of the roadways or parking area. The maximum deviations shall not exceed 1 /4 inch at any point. 3. Any point in the surface not meeting those requirements shall be immediately corrected. 3.6 OPENING TO TRAFFIC A. Open pavement to traffic when directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - 5 t" FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 08305 . r ACCESS DOORS 1 GENERAL FPART L . 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated access door and frame units. B. Ceiling locations. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS �* k A. B. Section 02220 - Portland Cement Plaster: Plaster ceilings. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Openings in gypsum board partitions and ceilings. t C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. D. Division 15: Plumbing and mechanical components requiring access. E. Section 15320 - Air Distribution: Access doors in ductwork. F. Division 16: Electrical components requiring access. 1.4 SUBMITTALS - A. Product Data 1. Provide sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. 2. Include descriptive data showing door and frame profile, recommended attachment methods and locations. 13. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, rough -in �^ dimensions and recommended finishing requirements. ` 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with mechanical, plumbing and electrical work requiring access units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J.L. Industries; Bloomington,MN. B. C. Karp Associates; Maspeth, NY. Milcor Limited Partnership; Lima, OH. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 7 t �' 03860396/98 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2.2 ACCESS UNITS A. Type: Non -Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit; Formed steel. B. Size: 22 inches square. C. Acceptable Product: Model WB manufactured by J.L. Industries. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 16 gage steel. _ B. Fabricate door panels of 14 gage steel single thickness steel sheet for non -rated doors. C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. D. Hardware: 1. Hinge: 175 degree concealed steel hinges with removable] pin. — 2. Lock: Manufacturer's standard 6 pin tumbler type cam lock. Key all locks alike. 2.4 FINISHES _ A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with alkyd baked on primer for field finishing specified in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 2 r„ FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 08364 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS r PART 1 -GENERAL I' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS f A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements apply L to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Steel sectional overhead doors. r.. B. Locations for sectional overhead doors are indicated on the drawings and schedules. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Installation of anchors in concrete: Division 3. B. Installation of anchors in masonry: Division 4. C. Field Painting: Division 9. D. Electric service characteristics for motor operators: Division 16. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 525-93 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993. C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. D. ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. E. NAGDM 102-1988 — Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; National Association of Garage Door Manufacturers; 1988. F. NEMA ICS 6-1993 -- Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. G. NEMA MG 1-1993 -- Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. H. UL 325 -- Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1986 (Revised 1988). 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Sectional overhead doors standard: Comply with NAGDM 102. 2. Wind loading: Sectional overhead doors shall comply with NAGDM 102 wind loading criteria unless otherwise indicated. a. Design and construct sectional overhead doors to withstand indicated wind loads as tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. r i ti r 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-1 I - FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 _ 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation directions demonstrate that products comply with contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings only for components which are not described completely in manufacturer's technical information. C. Samples, for color selection: 1. Manufacturer's full range of metal finish colors on 4- by 6-inch base metal sample. Primer only may be acceptable, verify at time of submittal. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: For information only, manufacturer's written certification, indicating doors comply with specified design criteria for the following: a. General requirements of NAGDM 102. b. Wind loading. C. Thermal performance. -- 2. Manufacturer's directions: Submit directions for installation and operation of door units; distribute a copy to installer before start of work. 3. Installer qualification: For information only, submit installer's written statement of compliance with installation experience requirement. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Door operation instructions and maintenance data for each door type. — F. Warranty: For information only, submit specimen copy of manufacturer's written warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire project. B. Qualifications: — 1. Installer qualifications: Door manufacturer's authorized installer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Automatic reversing: Doors with motor operators shall comply with requirements of UL 325. D. Certifications: 1. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with wind resistance design criteria. — 2. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with thermal performance design criteria. 3. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with NAGDM 102. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule the building in of masonry anchors for support of overhead sectional doors with masonry work. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. — 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Overhead Door Corporation. b. Raynor Garage Door Company. C. Wayne -Dalton Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: 1. Structural quality carbon steel, ASTM A 446, Class A, or commercial quality steel sheets, ASTM A 526; minimum yield point, 33,000 pounds per square inch; gage as indicated. 2. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525; minimum G90 zinc coating where indicated. B. Paint: 1. Metal primer: Manufacturer's standard epoxy primer. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Door: 1. Wind resistance: a. Load acting inward: 24 pounds per square foot of door surface area. b. Load acting outward: 20 pounds per square foot of door surface area. 2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam. a. Thermal resistance, R-value: 12 3. Interior surface: Painted galvanized steel. 4. Door section material: 20 gage galvanized steel. 5. Galvanized coating: G90, minimum. 6. Door section design: Ribbed profile. 7. Door finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on epoxy primer for field painting. 8. Counterbalancing mechanism: Torsion spring type. 9. Rollers: Case-hardened steel double rollers. 10. Installation: High lift vertical and follow roof slope tracks. 11. Electric operator: Hoist type with worm and gear reduction primary drive. a. Provide auxiliary manual chain hoist. b. Installation: Side -mounted. C. Electric motor: Totally enclosed nonventilated type. 1. Horsepower rating: 3/4 horsepower minimum, or as required to move the door to the fully open position in 13 seconds or less. This requirement will be tested and must conform. 2. Control enclosure: NEMA Type 1. d. Control station: 3-button push-button type. 1. Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a unique frequency. e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch. 12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass. 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-3 r i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 13. Accessories: a. Head and jamb weatherstripping. b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door. 14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Tracks: 1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction. 2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support of roller guides, for door type and size. 3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on center. 4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. B. Track Support: 1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight of door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation. 2. Wall support: Provide continuous angle anchored to wall and welded to track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks. C. Counterbalancing Mechanisms: - - 1. Torsion spring: a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular steel shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft. b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable attached to door, heavy duty, high performance. C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third points to support shafts over 16 feet long. d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door rollers at each track. -- e. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track. D. Electric Door Operators: 1. Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction mechanism and control devices. 2. Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use. 3. Door operator type: a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary chain hoist. 4. Electric motors: -- a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload; with capacity to move door at rate of 2/3 foot to 1 foot per second. b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1; controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with NEMA ICS 6. ' 5. Control station: a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with NEMA ICS 6. 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 E. Automatic Reversing Control: 1. Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber astragal located along full width of door bottom. 2. Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated. F. Weather Seals: 1. Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation. G. Vision Panels: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated, located where shown on the drawings. 2. Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing gasket. 3. Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware: 1. Heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with noncorrosive fasteners, as required for door type. 2. Hinges: a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by manufacturer for size of overhead door. b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts, or rivets where access to nuts is not available. C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet in width. 3. Rollers: a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections from door surface as required to suit slope of track. b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges. C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch diameter tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer for required door size. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Steel Door Sections: 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings. 2. Section end closures and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum along interior surface of section. 3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile. 4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary to comply with wind loading performance criteria. B. Insulation: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet. r 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-5 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Factory Finishing: 1. Steel door sections: a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and applyzinc phosphate conversion coat. b. Factory paint system: Apply prime coats to interior and exterior surfaces of door faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: -1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance _ with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center. C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust installation to provide smooth and quiet operation. B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance. 3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly. ti END OF SECTION 08364 J� 03860396/98 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-6 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Aluminum doors and frames. B. Door hardware. C. Integral air and vapor barrier. .r II 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this Section. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication: Metal fabricated attachment devices. C. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. D. Section 08700 - Hardware: Standard requirements for hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing, gaskets and glazing accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AADAF- 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. f D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum E. AAMA 1503.1 - Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections F. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. G. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel H. ASTM/A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. I. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. J. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. e+w K. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. L. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and M. Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ANSI/ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain T - Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. N. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. r'. O. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. ` P. 36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. r i 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 -- 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 150 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive ti and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq. ft. of wall area, measured at a -� reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E263. E. Vapor Seal; Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 1 inch sp, 72 degrees _ F., 40 percent RH: no failure. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with a minimum differential of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft and a maximum of 12.0 Ibf/sq ft. G. Thermal Transmittance of assembly (Excluding Entrances) : Maximum U value of [0.69] [0.45) Btu/sq. ft. per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. H. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by r- a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental effects to system components. I. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels or migrating moisture occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: indicate system dimensions; framed opening requirements and tolerances; affected related work and expansion and contraction joint location and details B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware and internal drainage details. C. Certificates: Manufacturers' Certificates certifying the Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 rO i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY 900-9330 A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Co., Inc.; Niles, MI. B. Architectural Products; Terrell, TX. C. Indal LTD, Tubelite Division ; Reed City, MI. D. Vistawall Architectural Products; E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ANSUASTM B209; 3003 alloy, H14 temper. C. Fasteners 1. Concealed: Stainless or galvanized steel. 2. Exposed: Stainless steel or aluminum. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 16, Type 1, red oxide. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4 112 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. B. Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, 6 inch nominal wide top rail, 3-3/4 inch nominal wide vertical stiles, 8 inch nominal wide bottom rail; bevelled glazing stops. C. Flashings: .040 inch thick aluminum; finish to match mullion sections where exposed. D. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 06800 - Glazing. F. Bituminous Paint: As specified in Section 09900 - Painting G. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. H. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. I. Hardware: Refer to schedule at end of this Section and section 08700 for quality requirements. 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at end of this section. 2. Refer to section 08700 - HARDWARE for quality requirements. 3. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Hager, LCN, Pemko, Rockwood, Triangle Brass and Von Durprin components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the standards specified in section 08700 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 2.4 FABRICATION 900-9330 A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of G- assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. ,d 2.5 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Clear anodized conforming AA Class 1, M10C22A31 and AAMA 607.1. B. Concealed Steel Items: Primed with iron oxide paint. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction ^ tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Install flashings. 1. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08700 for installation requirements. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. L. Install backing materials and perimeter sealant to method required to achieve 4 performance criteria and installation criteria, in accordance with Section 07900. t. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non -cumulative or 1 /16 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1 /32 inch. r�. f� 3.4 ADJUSTING �r. A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. 1 B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500. B. Protect finished Work from damage. 3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HEADING NO. 1 Door No. Al Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 1 Deadlatch 4722AN05-602-628 4568 Lever x US32D 1 Cylinder Specified in Section 08700 1 Closer P4041 1 Pull 112 x US32P x Type 6 or 7 mounting 1 Stop 1276CS 1 Threshold 170A HEADING NO. 2 Door No. B02 Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131191 4.5 x 4.5 1 Exit Device CD 35L x 03 1 Closer P4041 1 Threshold 170A 1 Stop 1200 ES Series, height as required. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING NO. 3 Door No. B08 Each Door to have: 3 pr. Hinges 2 Closer 2 Push/Pull Sets 2 Stops Door No.'s B0BA and 609 Each Pair to have: BB1 191 4.5 x 4.5 P4041 11247 x 4532D x Type 5 mounting 1276CS HEADING NO. 4 3 pr. Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 1 Exit Device CD 35476 x 03 active leaf 1 Exit Device CD 3547E0 2 Closer 4041 CUSH 3 Cylinders, specified in Section 08700 2 Stops 126CS 1 Threshold 170A HEADING NO. 5 Door No.'s D01 and D01 A Each Pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 1 Exit Device CD 3547NL-op x 392-6 x 4532b active leaf 1 Exit Device CD 3547EO x 392-6 x 4532b 2 Closer 4041 CUSH @ D01; 4041 CUSH H@D01 A 3 Cylinders, specified in Section 08700 1 Threshold 274A Door No. D03 Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 1 Closer 1 Push/Pull Set 1 Stop 1276CS HEADING NO. 6 BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 P4041 11247 x 4532D x Type 5 mounting 900-9330 r. 03860396198 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6 ,P' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Door No. D04 Each Door to have: 1.5 pr. Hinges 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Stop 1 Threshold HEADING NO, 7 1381191 4.5 x 4.5 35NL- op x 392-6 x 4532D P4041 1276CS 170A END OF SECTION 900-9330 03860396/98 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating sash; glass shop or site glazed. B. Operating hardware and insect screens. C. Perimeter sealant. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Supporting framing system. B. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AADAF-45- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA 101 - Specifications for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. C. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 904.1 - Specification for Friction Hinges in Window applications E. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, F. ASTM All 23 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) coatings on Iron and Steel Products.. G. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. H. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. I. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. J. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. L. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. M. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, with vision glass, designed for flush glazing into framing system specified in Section 08410. B. Configuration: Top hinged, Outward projecting bottoms. C. Glazing: Interior. r `4 03860396/98 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 E1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 900-9330 A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 Section 6, to a design pressure of 20 Ib/sq ft. as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.15 cfm ft of crack length measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 12.00 Ibf/sq ft with a water rate of 5 gal./hr. F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with — pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. G. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work; installation requirements; and interface with adjacent support members. B. Product Data 1. Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details, hardware and screening. C. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating window frame section screen and frame, pre -finished aluminum surfaces, glass units, and glazing materials. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA 101. B. Provide window units bearing AAMA certification label. r 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS _ A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing and installing commercial aluminum windows with minimum three years documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 k FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.13 WARRANTY. A. Submit in accordance with requirements of section 01700. B. Provide manufacturer's standard five year warranty for insulated glass units from seal 1011, failure, interpane dusting or misting and replacement of same. i PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. EFCO Corp.; B. Kawneer Co., Inc C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209; 5005 alloy, H14 temper. C. Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Exposed Fasteners: Aluminum; finish to match window frame. E. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC 20, zinc rich type. F. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800. G. Hardware 1 Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. 2. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops 3. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning, positive stop and adjustable friction shoe. 4. Wicket Screen: Manufacturer's standard hinged or sliding screen access to lever handle with integral spring catch. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frames: 1-1 /2 inch wide interior and 718 inch wide exterior x 2-7/8 inch deep profile, of 0.125 inch thick section; thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap -on type. B. Insect Screens: FS L-S-125, woven plastic mesh; 14/18 mesh size. C. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Resilient PVC; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installationand dynamic movement of perimeter seal. g B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. t D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. �` 03860396/98 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware. F. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. G. Assemble insect screens of rolled aluminum tubular sections. Miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taught in frame into frame and secured. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. Provide integral framed slide screen at window operator access. H. Double weatherstrip operable units. 2.5 FINISHES A. Finish Coatings: AAMA 607.1, Class II, AAM10C22A31,clear anodized for exterior and interior exposed surfaces. B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in aluminum storefront system in accordance with AAMA 101 -Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. B. Glaze window frame into perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. E. Install operating hardware. F. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. G. Install perimeter gaskets to method required to achieve performance criteria specified. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft., whichever is less. B. Maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 1 /32 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 03860396/98 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. END OF SECTION 03860396198 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5 (� FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 06700 HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework Hardware. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors D. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders E. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders F. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders G. Division 16 Sections: Electrical connection to door hardware. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE f A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. ' B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, `. provide type required by NFPA. c. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing j, laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. 1.' d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. r 1.5 REFERENCES A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1985) - Performance Standards for High Pressure Decorative Laminate. i B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges. 2. ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 3. ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices. 1 4. ANSI All 56.4 Door Controls - Closers. 5. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 6. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. 7. ANSI All 56.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. 8. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 1 ry FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 9. ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices. 10. ANSI Al56.16 Auxiliary Hardware. 11. ANSI Al56.17 Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots. 12. ANSI Al56.18 Materials and Finishes. 13. ANSI Al56.21 Thresholds 14. ANSI Al56.23 Electromagnetic Locks C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING & MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM F883 Padlocks. D. BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. 2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. 3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. E. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR) 1. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) F. DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 1. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames. 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. DHI Al15 Wood Door Preparation Standards G. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. H. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE 1. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). 1. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. 1. Building Materials Directory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI/BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner or Owner's representative and users to develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 03860396/98 HARDWARE 108700 - 2 r i l" r F r ' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 4. Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows: a. Key all doors different and key all doors to the same room alike. b. Key all exterior doors alike. C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key. d. Key mechanical room doors to existing utilities master key system. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI/BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electro- magnetic closer holder release devices. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Provide 2 blank keys for each lock cylinder. B. Provide 10 extra key lock cylinders for each master key group. 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 -" PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges 1. Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT ^ B. Lock and Latches 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 4. PDO Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA C. Push/Pulls 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA D. Electromagnetic Locks 1. Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT 2. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN E. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT '~ 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN F. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC G. Overhead Holders 1, 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Rixson Architectural Hardware; Charlotte, NC H. Manual and Automatic Bolts 1. Door Controls International (DC1); Dexter, MI r 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co; Wallingford, CT , 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA I. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO 4. Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY J. Protection Plates 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA K. Door Stops/Bumpers ., 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; ' Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA " r- 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 4 low 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX L. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS 900-9330 A. General 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Bommer, Corbin/Russwin, Glynn Johnson, Hager, Locknetics, Pemko, Richard Wilcox, Triangle Brass and Von Duprin. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices. b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to match profile of exit device trim. C. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90-degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. c. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. D. Protection Plates 1. Conformance a. Armor plates: ANSI A156.6, category J100. b. Kick plates: ANSI A156.6, category J102, stainless steel. C. Mop plates: ANSI A156.6, category J103, stainless steel. 2. Fabrication a. Metal Plates (1) Fabricate from 0.062 inch thick 0.050 inch thick stainless steel. (2) Bevel all edges. 3. Size a. 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors and height as follows: (1) Armor Plates: 36 inches. 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 E. F G. im J (2) Kick Plates: 10 inches except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, plate shall extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead. (3) Mop Plates: 4 inches. Miscellaneous 1. Metal Thresholds a. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolt exit devices. b. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hilti C7 anchors. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti "Togglers". 5. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: stainless steel. 6. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI All 56.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 600 at the Burn House and 626 or 630 at all other locations. b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 or 630. C. Door closers: BHMA 689 painted. d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware. f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware. 3. Door Protection Plates a. Metal Plates: BHMA 630. Keying 1. Provide a grand master keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 6 keys for each lock b. 3 master keys C. 3 grand master keys d. 2 control keys and 10 extra cylinder cores e. Blank keys: 20 total. . 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. C r-. 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 6 JA s FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 900-9330 A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Key Control Storage System 1. Install where directed by Architect. D. Kick Plates and Mop Plates 1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors. 2. Install mop plat on pull side of single -acting doors. E. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt F. Thresholds 1. Install in a bed of sealant, as specified in Section 07900, with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. G. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. H. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. '� 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE FIRE TRAINING/ADMINISTRATION/FIRE MARSHALL'S OFFICE/FIRE STATION #2 HEADING #1 1 Sgl. Dr. #A01, A24, C23, D30, D31 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges B81279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Privacy CL3420 NZD 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #2 1 Pr. Drs. #A03 each pair to have 3 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 2 Surface bolt 3922 1 Lockset CL 3455 NZD 2 Overhead door holders 70H x 70M-22 x S3 1 Threshold 170A 2 Drip cap 3452AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346A 1 set Weatherstrip 316 AV 1 pr. Astragal 18062 CP HEADING #3 1 Pr. Drs. #A04 each pair to have 3 pr. Hinges BB1199 4.5 x 4.5 2 Surface bolt 3922 1 Lockset CL3451 NZD 2 Kickplates 2 Overhead door holders 70H x 70M-22 HEADING #4 1 Sgl. Dr. #A05 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 861279 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 1 Lockset CL 3451 NZD 1 Closer 4041 CUSH STB 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door bottom 315 CN 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 8 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346C 1 Doorstop HEADING #5 1 Sgl. Dr. #A05A, A14, A22 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Exit Device ED 5200 N710 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 1 set Smokestops 1 Automatic Door Bottom 420 AVL 3 Silencers HEADING #6 1 Sgl. Dr. #A05A, A14, C24, C24A, D25, D25A, D26, D26A, D28, each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Passage CL3410 NZD 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #7 1 Sgl. Dr. #A06, A07, Al3, Al5, Alb, A20, A22A, A27 B21, B22, B23, B24, B33, B37, B37A, B38, C04, C05, CO6, C09, C 10, C 13A, C 16, C 17, C 18, C 19, C20, C21, C22, C25, D07, D08, D09, D10, D13, D14, D16, D17, D18, D19, D20, D21, D22, D23, D24, D27, D29, D32, D33 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3451 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #8 1 Sgl. Dr. #A11, A22A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Pull plate 1012-3 03860396/98 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 9 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1 Push plate 1001-3 1 Closer 1520P AL 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #9 1 Sgl. Dr. #A18B, A23, B30, B35A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 1 Exit device ED5200 N755 1 Closer 4041 CUSH STB 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door bottom 315 CN 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346A HEADING #10 1 Sgl. Dr. #A19, B02, D03, D04 1 Pr. Drs. #608, B08A, B09, D01, D01 A each to have 2 Cylinder 1000 626 Balance of hardware by door supplier HEADING #11 1 Sgl. Dr. #B01, B34, B35, B36, B36A, CO3, D02 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Exit device ED5200 N755 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #12 1 Sgl. Dr. #1306, 825, B29 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3455 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers 900-9330 6- 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 10 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING #13 1 Sgl. Dr. #B 10, B 14 i each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3457 NZD 1 Armorplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 1. 3 Silencers HEADING #14 1 Sgl. Dr. #1311, B17, 820, C14, C15 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Push Plate HL6 ,.; 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #15 r 1 Sgl. Dr. #B18, B19 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 1 Lockset CL 3451 NZD 1 Overhead door holder 70H x 70M-22 = 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door bottom 315 CN i 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346A HEADING #16 1 Sgl. Dr. #826, B27, B32, C07, C08, C11, C12, D11, D12 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3451 NZD 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #17 1 Sgl. Dr. # B29A, B29B each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Pull plate 1012-3 1 Push plate 1001-3 1 Closer 4041 CUSH STB 03860396/98 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 11 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #18 1 Pr. Drs. #B34A, B36B each pair to have 3 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 2 Exit devices ED5400 N755 x M54 2 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STB 2 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170A 2 Door bottom 315 CN 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 pr. Astragal18062CP 1 Overhead drip cap 346A HEADING #19 1 Sgl. Dr. #C13 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Deadlock DL4012 1 Pull Bar 1672 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #20 1 Sgl. Dr. #C26, C26A, C27, C27A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131199 4.5 x 4.5 1 Pushbutton Lock CM 5157-SEL 1 Closer 4041 P CUSH STB 1 Electric Strike 9010-630-RCP 1 Push Button 601 BK 1 Power Supply 510-TDM 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CSS 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Auto Door Bottom 420 AVL 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS HEADING #21 1 Sgl. Dr. #D07A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3455 03860396198 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 12 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1 Electric Strike 9010-630-RCP 1 Push Button 601 BK 1 Power Supply 510-TDM 1 Closer 4041 STB 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #22 1 Sgl. Dr. #09A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Pushbutton Lock CM 5157-SEL 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #23 1 Sgl. Dr. #1315, D15A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x SH NRP 1 Lockset ML2224 NSM HS 1 Deadlock DL4013 HS 1 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STB 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 1 Door bottom 315 CN 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346A @ D15A HEADING #24 1 Overhd #D15B each to have 1 Padlock PD5090 M44 258 Balance by door supplier 900-9330 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 13 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE HEADING #1 "- 1 Sgl. Dr. #01, 02, 13, 15, 15E, 15G, 15M, 16, 16E, 16H, 16K each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 1 Lockset ML2224 NSM 1 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STB 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170 A 1 Door bottom 315 CN ^` 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346C @ D15A HEADING #2 1 Overhd #02A, 15A, 15B, 15C, 15D, 15H, 15J, 15K, 15L, 16A, 16B, 16C, 16D, 16F, 16G, 16J each to have 1 Padlock PD5080 M44 258 Balance by door supplier HEADING #3 1 Sgl. Dr. #03, 04 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Privacy CL3420 NZD 1 Closer 1520 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #4 1 Sgl. Dr. #05 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 �- 1 Pull plate 1012-3 1 Push plate 1001-3 1 Closer 1520P 1 r- Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 14 Mal FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING #5 1 Sgl. Dr. #06, 17 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Push Latch HL-6 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 1 Auto door bottom 420 AVL 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV HEADING #6 1 Sgl. Dr. #07, 17A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3455 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 3 Silencers HEADING #7 1 Sgl. Dr. #08 door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3455 1 Armorplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers HEADING #8 1 Sgl. Dr. #09, 10 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3451 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 3 Silencers 03860396/98 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 15 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900.9330 -- HEADING #9 1 Sgl. Dr. r #11 door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 " 1 Lockset CL3451 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 1 Auto door bottom 420 AVL 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV HEADING #10 1 Sgl. Dr. #12 -- door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Lockset CL3455 NZD 1 Closer 1520P 1 Armorplate (cylinder side mounted) 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 1 Auto door bottom 420 AVL 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV HEADING #11 1 Sgl. Dr. #13 door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 891168 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 1 Lockset ML 2257 NSM '- 1 Overhead door holder 70H x 70M-22 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door Bottom 315CN 1 Weatherstrip 316AV 1 Overhead drip cap 346A HEADING #12 1 Pr. Drs. #14 r pair to have 3 pr. Hinges BB1199 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP .. 2 Surface bolt 3922 1 Deadlock DL4017 1 Pull plate 1012-3 1 Push plate 1001-3 2 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STS 2 Armorplate 2 Auto door bottom 420 AVL �- 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV 1 pr. Astragal18062CP 03860396/98 HARDWARE 08700 - 16 - t j� t FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING #13 r r `. 1 Sgl. Dr. #14A door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 1199 4.5 x 4.5 1 Deadlock DL 4017 1 Pull Plate 1012-3 1 Push Plate 1001-3 1 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STB 1 Armorplate 1 Wallstop 1276 CCS 1 Auto door bottom 420 AVL 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV HEADING #14 1 Pr. Drs. #15F door to have 3 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 2 Surface bolt 3922 I ! 1 Lockset 2 Closer 4041 H-CUSH STB 2 Kickplate 1 Threshold 170A + 2 Door bottom 315CN �w 1 set Weatherstrip 316AV BURN HOUSE HEADING #1 rr i, Sgl. Dr. #01, 01 A each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 4310 4.5 x 4.5 x USP 1 Door latch 225-P43 1 Padlock PD5080 M44 258 HEADING #2 �^ Sgl. Dr. #02, 03, 04, 08 L each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 1 Door latch 225-P43 Ip HEADING #3 Overhd #08A each to have r 1 Padlock PD5080 M44 258 Balance by door supplier r� v I 03860396/98 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 17 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING #4 Window #U, V, W each to have 2 pr. Hinges BB2169 4.5 x 4.5 x LISP FIRE TRAINING TOWER HEADING #1 Sgl. Dr. #101, 104, 201, 301, 302, 401, 402, 501, 502, 601 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 x LISP 1 Exit device 88TP-BE RCB SNB 1 Closer 4110 STB BL 1 Kickplate 1 Wallstop 1279 ES HEADING #2 Sgl. Dr. #1101, 2101 each to have 1 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 x LISP 1 Passage set CL 3410 NZD 1 Closer 1520 1 Wall stop 1276 CCS 1 Kickplate HEADING #3 Sgl. Dr. #102 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 13131279 4.5 x 4.5 x LISP 1 Lockset CL 3451 NZD 1 Closer 4110 STB BL 1 Kickplate 1 Wall stop 1279 ES HEADING #4 Pr. Drs. #103, 203, 303, 403, 503 each pair to have 3 pr. Hinges 661279 4.5 x 4.5 2 Surface bolt 3922 1 Passage CL3410 NZD 2 Overhead door holders 70S x 70M-22 03860396198 HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 18 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX HEADING #5 Pair floor access doors each pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges 1850 LP 03860396/98 END OF SECTION HARDWARE 900-9330 08700 - 19 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. B. Glass for hollow metal and aluminum frame work. C. Unframed Mirrors 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and sidelites. B. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors. C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. D. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows. E. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors. 1.4 REFERENCES . A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets Setting Blocks and Spacers. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. H. ASTM C1085 - Bulyl Rubber -Based Solvent - Release Sealants, I. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. J. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. K. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. L. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. M. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. N. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 0. ASTM E4802 - Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet. P. GANA - Glazing Manual. Q. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide. R. GANA - Sealant Manual. S. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 T. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association. U. UL 752 - Bullet Resisting Equipment. V. UL 972 - Burglary Resistant Glazing 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS r A. Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 Ib/sq ft as measured in accordance with ANSUASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1 /200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. C. Samples: 1. Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units. Mark each sample to match glazing legend. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that glass meets or exceeds requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 2. Certify that sealed insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and GANA Laminated Glass Design Guide for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 03860396198 GLAZING 08800 - 2 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r` 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Ten year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. 2. Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. C. Five year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Insulating Glass Units: Include coverage for from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. B. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. C. Rear Projection Screen Glazing 1. Draper, Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G1 - Opaque Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E774 and ASTM E773; double pane with butyl primary seal and silicone secondary edge seal and interpane space purged dry {hermetic) air. a. Outer pane of Heat Treated Glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition B - black ceramic coated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear Quality q3 glazing select. b. Inner pane of heat treated glass complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select. 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C. Spacer: Dessicant filled mill finish aluminum with mitered and bent soldered corners. d. Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch minimum. G 2 - Tinted Tempered Insulating Glass Units : ASTM E774 and ASTM E773; double pane with butyl primary seal and silicone secondary edge seal and interpane space purged dry (hermetic) air. a. Outer pane of gray Heat Treated Glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A - uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Fiat; Class 3 Tinted Light -Reducing; Quality q3 glazing select; light transmittance of 44 percent; conforming to 'ANSI Z97.1. b. Inner pane of heat treated glass complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1. C. Spacer: Dessicant filled mill finish aluminum with mitered and bent soldered corners. d. Total Unit Visible Light Transmittance: 39 percent. e. Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch minimum. G 3 - Tinted Insulating Glass Units : ASTM E774 and ASTM E773; double pane with butyl primary seal and silicone secondary edge seal. Interpane space purged dry (hermetic) air. a. Outer pane of gray Tinted Float Glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass Flat; Class 3 Tinted, Light -Reducing; Quality q3 - Glazing select; light transmittance of 44 percent. b. Inner pane of Clear Float Glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 Clear; Quality q3 - Glazing select. C. Spacer: Dessicant filled mill finish aluminum with mitered and bent soldered corners. d. Total Unit Visible Light Transmittance: 39 percent. e. Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch minimum. G 4 - Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 11 - Wired Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Translucent; Form 1; Quality q8 glazing; Mesh, m1 - Diamond; thickness as noted on drawings. G 5 - Safety Glass: 0.060 inch thick clear polyvinyl butyryl sandwiched between two 1/8 inch thick panes of glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass Flat; Class 1 Clear; Quality q3 - Glazing select. G 6 - Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as noted on drawings. G 7 - Transparent Mirror Glass: 0.060 inch thick grey tinted polyvinyl butyryl sandwiched between two 1 /8 inch thick panes of glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass Flat; Class 1 Clear; Quality q3 - Glazing select with pyroliticaly applied mirror coating on one side. G 8 - Rear Projection Screen Glazing: Cast Acrylic, 1 /4 inch maximum thickness, with cast -in -light diffusion agents with rear side designed as a Fresnel lens with a 0.5 mm pitch. Tint screen with manufacturer's standard high contrast tint to enhance color contrast. Fabricate front (audience side) of glazing as a linear lens with a 0.3 mm pitch and treat with anti-relectance coating for glare control without interfering with projected image. a. Screen Gain: 5.0 +/- 0.3 on axis. b. Horizontal Half Gain Angle: Not less than 33° from projection axis. 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 4 r r, FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX ; 900-9330 C. Vertical Half Gain Angle: +/-9-10° from projector axis. d. Fabricate screen to comply with UL 94 HB- e. Surround Frame: Manufacturer's standard 7/16 inch wide x 1-3/16 inch high with charcoal bronze finish. 9. G 9 - Tinted Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 2 Tinted Heat -Absorbing and Light -Reducing; Quality q3 glazing select; Style A - Higher light transmittance; visible light transmittance of 44 percent; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as noted on drawings. B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality q1 mirror select; 1/4 inch thick sizes noted on Drawings. C. Glazing Compounds 1. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085 - Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -skinning. 2. Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. a. Color: As selected by Architect. b. Structural Silicone: Provide high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials where sealant bonds glass to substrate. 3. Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; two component; chemical curing, non - sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. a. Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Polyurethane Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component, chemical curing, non -staining, non -bleeding, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35. a. Color: As selected by Architect. D. Glazing Accessories 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or Silicone, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required for glazing channel; black color. 4. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 - Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 5. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 6. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 5 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. _ 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance ._ requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final r compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. Exterior Glazing 1. Dry Method (Preformed Gaskets) a. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. b. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. C. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. d. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. e. Install wedge gasket with sufficient pressure to attain full contact of gasket on opposite side of glazing. C. Interior Glazing 1. Dry Method (Tape and Tape) a. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting + 1 /16 inch above sight line. b. Place setting blocks at location as recommended by glazing manufacturer with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 6 I I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX s 900-9330 C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. d. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. e. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. f. Knife trim protruding tape. 2. Dry Method (Preformed Gaskets) a. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. b. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. C. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. d. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. e. Install wedge gasket with sufficient pressure to attain full contact of gasket on opposite side of glazing. D. Rear Projection Glazing: Install glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with Fresnel lens (circular pattern) facing the projection source. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. D. Clean rear projection glazing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 GLAZING 08800 - 7 ri FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 900-9330 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal furring and lathing. B. Portland cement plaster system. C. Aggregate surface finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Wall substrate surface. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 08305 - Access Doors: Access panels. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. B. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. C. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. D. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath. E. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters. - F. ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. G. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. H. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster. I. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 11240 deflection under superimposed dead load and wind uplift loads. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data I 1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. -- D. Samples 1. Submit two samples, 24 x 24 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 1 t FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lather 1. Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with three years documented experience. 2. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1063. B. Plasterer 1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with three years documented experience. 2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual. C. Mock-up 1. Construct mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, which includes furring, lathing, plaster finish, color, substrate, incidental flashings, sealants, and other components. Coordinate with installation of associated work specified in other sections. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample shall be kept at project site until completion of all work of this section. 4. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Finish Stucco 1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Alburquerque, NM. 2. Le Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA. 3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL. !. B. Moldings 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp; Birmingham, AL. 2. Keene Building Products; Libertyville, IL. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Main Soffit Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; rust inhibitive paint finish coating, ; 3/4 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch high, length as required. B. Furring Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; rust inhibitive paint finish coating, 3/8 inch deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required. C. Hangers: ASTM C1063, Galvanized steel, of size to suit application, to rigidly support ceiling components in place, to deflection limits as indicated. D. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and length as required. E. Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Galvanized, flat diamond mesh; 3.4 Ib/sq ft. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 �- FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 F. Moldings 1. Material: Formed galvanized sheet steel, minimum 26 gage; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges. 2. Finish: 3. Acceptable Product: Following are product numbers of Keene Building Proiucts a. Soffit Edge Molding: #40 expansion joint with perforated reveal, modified as indicated on drawings. b. Control Joint: CJ series. G. Corner Mesh: Same material and finish specified for metal lath; minimum 2 inches wide. H. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place. I. Access Panels, Non -Fire Rated In Plaster on Metal Furring: Specified in Section 08305. J. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I Portland. K. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S or C207, Type S. L. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897. M. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. N. Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard premixed portland cement and aggregate type; color as selected by Architect. 2.3 PLASTER MIXES A. Mix and proportion base and brown -coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926, Type C. B. Finish Coat 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION i A. Verify surfaces and site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. 3.2 PREPARATION r-. A. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water. B. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ( 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General ' 1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work in accordance with ASTM C1063 and the following: B. Soffit Framing 1. Securely anchor hangers to structural members. a-- 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 k w FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 3. Size and space hangers in conformance with ASTM C1063, Table 1 to achieve deflection limits indicated. 4. Install furring to height indicated after above soffit work is complete. 5. Install soffit furring independent of walls, columns, and above soffit work. 6. Space main carrying channels at maximum 42 inch centers; not more than 6 inches from wall surfaces. 7. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. 6. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. 9. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening. 10. Laterally brace suspension system. 11. Establish contraction, control, and expansion joints with specified joint device. _ 12. Splice laps in main and furring channels in conformance with ASTM C1063. C. Lathing 1. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 2. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 3. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. 4. Attach metal lath to metal soffit framing in accordance with ASTM C1063. Space attachments at maximum 6 inches on center. D. Accessories 1. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches _ from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 2. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 3. Butt and align ends of all moldings. Secure rigidly in place. 4. Coordinate work with installation of metal access panels. Refer to Section 08305. 5. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. 6. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. E. Control Joints 1. Locate exterior control joints every 12 feet in each direction or as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. r 2. Establish control joints with specified joint device. 3. Coordinate joint placement with other related work. 3.4 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 5/16 inch brown coat to a nominal -- thickness of 5/16 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1 /8 inch over metal lathed surfaces. C. Apply brown coat immediately following initial set of scratch coat. D. Moist cure brown coats. E. After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat. F. Apply finish coat and wood float to a smooth and consistent fine sand float finish. G. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface: H. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours. I. Tempering of finish -coat plaster is prohibited. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet. 03860396/98 END OF SECTION PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 900-9330 09220 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 96163*1401 SECTION 69250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal grid suspension ceiling framing. C. Framing accessories. D. Acoustical sealant. E. Gypsum board. F. Taped and sanded joint treatment. G. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood blocking for support of wall mounted equipment and accessories. B. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. C. Section 07270 Firestopping: Fire -resistive -rated joint sealants. D. Section 08111 - Steel Doors and Frames. E. -Section 08305 - Access Doors: Metal access panels. F. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster. G. Section 09300 - Tile. H. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A118.9 - Cementitious Backer Units. B. ASTM C36 Gypsum Wallboard. C. ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. D. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. G. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. H. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. I. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. J. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. K. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. L. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. M. ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. N. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber -Based Solvent -Release Sealants. 0. ASTM C1280 - Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 P. ASTM D3678 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Interior Profile Extrusions. Q. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications. R. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. S. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. T. ASTM Ell 19 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. U. ASTM E497 - Installing Sound -Isolating Lightweight Partitions. V. ASTM Ell 190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. W. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. X. FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools). Y. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. Z. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. AA. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. BB. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: STC 48 in accordance with ASTM E90. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Exterior Non -Axial Load Bearing Components a. Maximum Deflection: L1600 at 20 Ibf per sq. ft. 2. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft. 3. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 Ibf per sq. ft. minimum. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustical seals, and framing systems. 2. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, joint compounds and decorative finish. 3. Samples: a. Submit two samples 24x24 inch in size illustrating wall and ceiling texture. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to applicable code as indicated on the drawings for fire rated assemblies. a. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL (No. W415) or GA File No. WP1200. 03860396198 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Field Samples 1. On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area for the following applications. Simulate finished lighting f-- conditions for review of in -place unit of Work. a. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes. ` b. Surfaces indicated to receive textured finishes specified in this Section. D. Material Compatibility 1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Celotex Building Products. B. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Co. D. United States Gypsum Co. E. Substitutions: In accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Exterior Non -axial Load Bearing Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645 - galvanized sheet steel, C shaped sized in accordance with the requirements specified in + paragraph "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION". 4 t^ 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick (unless otherwise required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. — 3. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 4. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 5. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric -shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). -- 6. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track equal to "Shadow line" design by Fire Track. B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick except where -- otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 4. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C79; moisture resistant type; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. 5. Cementitious Backing Board: ANSI 118.9 High density, glass fiber reinforced, 1 /2 inch nominal thick. C. Accessories 1. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1085; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 2. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C 1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1 /4 — inch wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. 3. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4397; minimum 10 mils thick. 4. Vapor Barrier Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer. 5. Sheathing Joint Tape -- a. Self -adhering rubberized asphalt adhesive tape. b. Acceptable Product's W.R. Grace "Perm -a -Barrier" wall seam tape. 6. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 7. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 8. Wall Texture: Latex based non -aggregated texturing material. 9. Ceiling Texture: As specified in Section 09900 PAINTING. 10. Cementitious Backing Board Tape: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 4 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r` 11. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. r.. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and r type recommended by framing manufacturer. C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing (1) Screws complying with ASTM C954 and [ASTM C 1002 type as required for substrate indicated. j" (2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. f e. Gypsum Board to Wood Framing: Nails complying with ASTM C514. 12. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with r. capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. �- B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Metal Studs 1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center except where otherwise indicated. �-. 3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only r and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide deflection track. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. [Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. r' 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs or bolt or screw steel channels to ' studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, 4 toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and other wall mounted equipment. 6. Coordinate installation of anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Ceiling Framing 1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-600 and manufacturer's instructions. L 2. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 3. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. 4. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. t 5. Laterally brace entire suspension system. r- 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Acoustical Accessories 1. Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. 2. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM E497, and manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: a. Metal Framing: Two beads. b. Face Layer. 5. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough -in boxes, in conformance with ASTM E497. D. Vapor Barrier 1. Install vapor barrier full height on interior side of exterior walls, tight across framing members, in maximum practical length to minimize joints. 2. Lap joints minimum 2 inches and tape joint full length. 3. Tape all cuts, rips and tears. 4. Attach vapor barrier to framing members with minimum fasteners to maintain toughness until gypsum board can be installed. E. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, UL, GA600 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontal, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing. 5. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 6. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated. 7. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and at other locations as indicated. F. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. 2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and corners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Spray apply light to medium finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 2. Ceilings: Spray apply light to medium finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved samples. H. Gypsum Sheathing 1. Install gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over framing members. 2. Stagger vertical joints. 3. Install sheathing with minimum width of two framing spaces. 4. Apply sheathing tape to all horizontal and vertical joints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 is FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture. D. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09300 TILE 900-9330 t: PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. r 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic mosaic tile floor finish using the thinset application method. B. Porcelain tile floor finish using the thinset application method. C. Mortar bed installation. D. Ceramic tile walls and base finish using the thinset application method. t 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Trowelling of floor slab for tile application and floating of floor slab for mortar bed. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Control joint components. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Cementitious backer unit and gypsum wallboard �^ substrate. p D. Section 15200 - Piping and Accessories: Floor drains. 1.4 REFERENCES i A. ANSIlTCA A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive. B. ANSIlTCA A108.5 —Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex r Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSIlTCA 108.10 -Installation of Grout in Tilework. D. ANSIlTCA A11B.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. E. F. ANSIlTCA A116.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. ANSIlTCA A116.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. E G. ANSI/TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2. H. ANSIlTCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. I. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS r- A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Submit shop drawings indicating the layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, and setting details. 2. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. r 4. Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, k cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes. B. Samples 1. Mount file and apply grout on two 12 x 12 inch plywood panels to indicate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. 03860396/98 TILE 09300 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years experience. 2. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1 B. Installer Qualifications 1. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. C. Store bagged materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather. D. Store the in manner to prevent scratching, chipping and breaking. E. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F. during installation of mortar materials. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide approximately 4% maintenance materials of each the specified to the Owner at location as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile 1. American Marrazzi, Tile, Inc. 2. American Olean Tile Co. 3. Crossville Ceramis 4.. Dal -Tile Corp. r 5. Florida Tile Industires, Inc. 6. Monarch Tile, Inc. 7. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 03860396/98 TILE 09300 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Tile Setting and Grouting Materials �►^ 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Custom Building Products 3. Dal -Tile Corp. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mepei Corporation 6. Summitville Tiles, Inc. C. Waterproofing Membrane r' 1. Compotite Corporation 2.2 MATERIAL s A. Tile 1. Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.1 !" b. Type: Vitreous or porcelain with moisture absorption of 0 to 0.5 percent. C. Size: 2 x 2 x 1 /4 inch d. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. e. Edge: Cushioned f. Surface Finish: Unglazed g. Color: As selected by Architect. 2. Porcelain Floor Tile a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.1 b. Type: Vitreous with moisture absorption of over 3.0 percent C. Size 8 x 8 x 3/8 inch d. Pattern As indicated on drawings. e. Edge Square f. Surface Finish Unglazed g. Color As selected by Architect. h. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C1028; not less than .50 wet and dry. L Scratch Resistance: 5 to 8 MOHS j. Traffic Rating: Heavy 3. Ceramic Wall and Ceiling Tile a. Conformance: b. Type: ANSI/TCA A137. Non -vitreous with moisture absorption over 7.0 t percent C. Size 4 1 /4 x 4 1 /4 x 1 /4 inch d. Edge Cushioned e. Surface Finish Matte glazed f. Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's �... group 2 colors. 4. Base a. At Mosaic Tile Floors: Match wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, size and color; 4 1 /4 inch high; coved bottom and internal corner. j` b. At Porcelain Tile Floors: Match floor tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, size and color; 4 inch high; straight bottom and internal corner, radiused outside corners. 5. Trim Shapes: Surface caps, comers and miscellaneous pieces to match adjacent tile surface. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI/TCA A136.1, Type 1; thinset bond type. C. Thinset Mortar: ANSI/TCA All 18.5; Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. t 03860396/98 TILE 09300 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 D. Grout 1. Type: Pre -mixed cementitious with latex additive. 2. Colors a. Floors: Manufacturer's standard french grey. b. Walls and Ceilings: Manufacturer's standard white. _ E. Mortar Bed 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I. 2. Sand: ASTM C-144. 3. Water: Potable. F. Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and texture as adjacent wall tile. 1. Soap Dish: Without handle, recess mounted; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 75 lbs. 2. Towel Pin: Surface mounted with extension for casting into small wall openings; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 30. 3. Cleavage Membrane: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt or 4 mil thick polyethylene film. 4. Shower Pan: 40 mil fungus, mildew and mold resistant PVC membrane flashing 2.3 MIXES A. Mortar Bed 1. Mix 1 part Portland Cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume. 2. Add minimum amount of water to produce workable consistency. B. Thinset and Grout 1. Mix and proportion pre -mix bond coat and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION r - A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that surfaces are plumb and level and have square corners with the following maximum variation: 1. Subfloor Surfaces: 1 /8 inch from true flat in 10 feet with no abrupt, irregularities greater than 1 /32 inch. 2. Vertical Surfaces: a. Deviation from plumb: 1 /8 inch in 8 feet. b. Deviation from alignment: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Apply conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION - A. General 1. Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03860396/96 TILE 09300 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r f 2. Lay floor and wall tile in grid pattern centered in both directions in each space or on each wall and ceiling area. 3. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 4. Place edge strips at exposed tile edges in floors. p-' 5. Cut and fit the tight to penetrations through tile. 6. Form corners and bases neatly. 7. Place the joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in the size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. S. Allow the to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting 9. Grout tile joints and damp cure for minimum of 72 hours after installation. 10. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar �- planes. 6 B. Control Joints 1. Provide joints where indicated on the drawings, and if not indicated, provide in conformance with TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 3. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Mortar Bed �^ 1. Install cleavage membrane. 2. Apply mortar bed over cleavage membrane to a thickness as indicated on the drawings. 3. 4. Use mortar within 2 1 /2 hours of initial mixing. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. D. Floor Tile 1. Over Mortar Bed �^ 2. Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F111 without reinforcing. 3. Over Cured Concrete Slab f., 4. Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F113. E. Wall Tile 1. Over masonry walls, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number W202. 2. Over cementitious backer units, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number W244. 3. Over gypsum wallboard, install in accordance with ANSI 108-4 and TCA Handbook ... number W242. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Install tile with the following variation from true flatness: 1. 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 2. From edge of tile to edge of adjacent tile: 1 /32 inch. B. Install grout with the following variation from flush with tile surface: 1. Maximum 3/64 inch for 1 /4 inch wide joint. 2. Maximum 1 /16 inch for 3/8 inch wide joint. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound tile after setting. B. Replace hollow sounding units. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Wash tile thoroughly to remove all residue. 03860396/98 TILE r' 09300 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Use of acid in cleaning solutions is prohibited. C. Replace all broken chipped or otherwise damaged tile. D. Remove and replace tiles that do not conform to specified tolerances. 3.7 PROTECTION _ A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for minimum of seven days after installation. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 TILE 09300 - 6 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �^ A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical panels. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 07200 - Building Insulation: Thermal and Acoustical Insulation over Acoustical Ceilings. B. Section 15280 - Fire Protection Sprinkler System: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. C Section 15320 - Air Distribution: -Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. D. Section 16500 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings F. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. G. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. H. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to code indicated on drawings for combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Flame Spread: Class II, 26-75. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 4 r" 03660396/98 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Identify acoustical panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, _ cross runner, and edge trim. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS .— A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F., and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and - approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. _ 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 1 box of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems ,... 1. Grid - Type C4, C5 and C10 units a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Type: Exposed T C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 2. Grid - Type C8 and C9 units a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Type: Exposed T C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating and cold rolled aluminum cap. 03860396/98 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX B. C. r� i 900-9330 3. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1 /360. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. 2. Type C4 a. Size: 24 x 24 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.65 - .75 g. CAC Range: Minimum 40 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None i. Edge Detail: Reveal j. Surface Color: White k. Pattern: D I. Acceptable Product: USG Acoustone "F" 3. Type C5 a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.65 - .75 g. CAC Range: Minimum [301 [351 [401 [ ] h. Fire Hazard Classification: None i. Edge Detail: Square j. Surface Color: White k. Pattern: D 1. Acceptable Product: USG Acoustone "F". 4. Type CS a. Size: 24 x 24, inches. b. Thickness: 1 /2 inches. C. Type: III d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.70 - .80 g. CAC Range: Minimum 25 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None i. Edge Detail: Square j. Surface Color: White k. Pattern: Z, perforated, small holes, non -directional. 5. Type C9 a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.70 - .80 g. CAC Range: Minimum 25 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None t- 03860396/98 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 i. Edge Detail: Square j. Surface Color: White k. . Pattern: Z, perforated, small holes, non -directional. 6• Type C10 a. Size: 24 x 24 inches. b. Thickness: 1 inch. C. _ Type: XII d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.85 - .95 g. CAC Range: 25 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None L Edge Detail: Square j. Surface Color: White k. Pattern: Z, nubby. I. Acceptable Product: USG Orion. _ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1 /360 -- maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced,avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, -- reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. B. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent _ of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 11. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 03860396/98 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r 12. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical. lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay all units in basket weave pattern. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 4. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft of an exterior door. 2. Install light fixture boxes constructed in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1 /8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.4 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Contracting Officer at location designated. END OF SECTION 4 03860396/98 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 09520 ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Fabric covered acoustical wall panels. B. Anchoring devices and perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06265 - Plastic Laminate Wall Panels: Adjoining finish. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems: Supporting substrate. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of acoustical wall panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: I a. Flame Spread: Class II, 26-75. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify acoustical panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on panel core and fabric covering. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of each �.. acoustic unit. C. Certificates 1. Submit copies of test certificates stating that panels meet specified requirements. r 03860396/98 09520 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F., and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical panels until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustical panels after interior wet work is dry. _ 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 1 roll of each type of fabric panel covering to Owner for repair purposes. PART 2 PRODUCTS — 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Wall Panels a. Conformance: ASTM C635. b. Type: Perforated, non-combustible mineral fiberboard. C. Finish: Factory applied woven fabric, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. d. Height: As indicated on drawings. e. Width: 30 inches. f. Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal. g. Acceptable Product: United States Gypsum, Silent 65. B. Accessories 1. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate scheduled. — 2. Fasteners: Concealed type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate scheduled. 3. Trim a. Manufacturer's standard bottom angle, top channel, starter and splines. b. Finish: Covered to match panel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION "— A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of panels will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 03860396/98 09520 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.2 INSTALLATION 900-9330 A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. B. Install after major finish work is complete. C. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from plumb and level surface: 1 /8 inch in 10 ft. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 09520 - 3 F FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 900-9330 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Sheet vinyl flooring. D. Resilient stair skirting. E. Resilient stair treads and integral nosing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Stair construction. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Cove trim sealant. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall materials to receive base. D. Section 09680 - Carpet - Termination edging of adjacent floor finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2047 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. B. ASTM D4078 - Water Emulsion Floor -Polish. C. D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. E. ASTM F1066 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. r F. ASTM F1303 Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. G. FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition. H. Rubber Manufacturers Association - Moisture Emission Test Unit 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable applicable UBC code as indicated on drawings for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum [0.45) [0.22) watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662. 3. Wall base: Flame spread maximum 75, smoke developed maximum 450 per ASTM E84. r i 1.6 SUBMITTALS �. A. Shop Drawings i 1. Provide seaming plan for sheet vinyl flooring. r 03860396/98 RESILIENT. FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. C. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. D. Samples _ 1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial color selection. 2. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. 3. Submit four samples 12 inches long for each base and stair material. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and — suggested methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS — A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain _ conditions above 55 degrees F. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one box of each color of tile, 66 sq ft of each color and type of sheet vinyl flooring 50 lineal feet of base and 10 lineal feet of stair materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Flooring Types F1 and F6 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. 7arkett, Inc., Parsippany, NJ. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4 Azrock Industries, Inc., San Antonio, TX. B. Sheet Flooring Type F3 — 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.; Sheboygan, WI. 2. Tarkett, Inc.; Parsippany, NJ.' 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 4. Congoleum Corp.; Lawrenceville, NJ. C. Resilient Base 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH. — 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 03860396198 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 2 — FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL. 5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH. 6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH. D. Accessories: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS 900-9330 A. Vinyl Composition Tile F1 1. Conformance: ASTM F1066, Class 2. 2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1 /8 inch thick 3. Color/Pattern: Color and pattern through total thickness. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's premium color series. B. Solid Vinyl Tile 1. Conformance: FS-SS-T-312, Type III 2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1 /8 inch thick. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard C. Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl Type F3 1. Conformance: ASTM F1303, Type 11, Grade 1, Class B, 2. Thickness: Total of .080 inch. 3. Color and Pattern: Through total thickness; as selected from manufacturer's standard. 4. Size: Width of 78 inch x length required to minimize seams. 5. Wearing surface: No -wax. D. Base 1. Type: Solid rubber or vinyl with coved base. 2. Size: 4 inch high; 1 /8 inch thick; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Length: Roll. 4. Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base. E. Rubber Stair Treads 1. Nominal Thickness: 3/16 inch tapered. 2. Nosing Style: Round; not less than 1-5/8 inch deep. 3. Design Pattern: Diamond, with 2 parallel abrasive stripes near front edge. 4. Color/Style: Marbleized - as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. F. Stair Risers 1. Maintain height and length in one piece, matching treads in material and color: 2. Thickness: 0.080 inch. G. Stringers 1. Maintain height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 2. Thickness: 0.080 inch. H. Accessories 1. Subfioor Filler: Cementitious type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. 4. Coved Base Cap: Extruded aluminum. 5. Sheet Flooring Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color as selected by Architect. 6. Filler for Coved Base: Manufacturer's standard plastic or wood. 7. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 03860396/98 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 900-9330 A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1 /8 inch in 10 ft, _ and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Verify that concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content as recommended by manufacturer as follows: 1. Prior to installantion of any resilient flooring, conduct quantitative moisture emissions tests in accordance with Rubber Manufacturers Association Guidelines. 2. Maximum Allowable Moisture Content: 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. — 3. Test Quantities: Minimum of 4 tests for areas up to 5,000 sq. ft. and one additional test for each additional 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area. 4. Allow areas of floor containing more than the allowable moisture content to dry _ a minimum of 48 hours before retesting. D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. _ E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. B. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate. F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion _ 3. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. 4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure metal strips before installation of flooring with stainless steel screws. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. 5. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, millwork, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. -- 6. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. 7. Fit joints tightly. B. Sheet Flooring 1. Lay flooring with joints and seams in accordance with seaming plan parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1 /3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. _ 2. Double cut sheet; rout seams using flooring manufacturer's router; provide heat welded seams. 3. Install coved base as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated , and cover top edge with metal cap strip. 03860396/98 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 4. Seal strip to wall with sealant specified in section 07900. C. Tile Flooring 1. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. 2. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical the pattern. 3. Allow minimum 1 /2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 4. Install tile to ashlar pattern. D. Base 1. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. 2. Miter internal corners. 3. At external corners, use premolded units. 4. At exposed ends, use premolded units. 5. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 6. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. E. Stair Coverings 1. Install stair nosing, stair treads, and stair risers in one piece for full width and depth of tread. 2. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile of width sufficient to provide two inches minimum above stair nose, measured perpendicular to stair slope. 3. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction. B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 5 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue down carpet. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Base finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM D 418-82 Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction. C. ASTM D 1335-67 Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Covering. D. ASTM D 1423-82 Twist in Yarns by the Direct -Counting Method. E. ASTM D 2257-80 Extractable Matter in Yarns. F. ASTM D 3936-80 Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile Floor Coverings. G. FS DDD-C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic. H. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, & Rev. A Modacrylic J Polyester, Polypropylene. I. (CPSC) Publication: 16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpet and Rugs. J. (AATCC) Test Methods: 16E-1982 Colorfastness to Light: Water -Cooled Rev 85 Xenon - arc Lamp, Continuous Light. K. AATCC Crockmeter Method: 165-1986 Colorfastness to Crocking. t L. Carpet & Rug Institute Publication: CRI-104-1986 Installation of Textile Floorcovering l Materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet. 2. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 4. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing. B. Samples 1. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. r r 03860396/98 CARPETING 09680 1 F FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with ten years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition for applicable flame spread/ smoke �. developed for carpet flammability requirements of 26 - 75 / 0 - 450 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -' A. Carpet 1. The Blacknall Company. 2. Collins & Aikman Corporation. 3. The Harbinger Company. 4. J & J Industries, Inc. _ 5. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. 6. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/Burlington Industries, Inc. 7. Milliken Contract Carpets. 8. Mohawk Carpet Corporation. -` 9. Stevens Carpet. B. Sub -floor Filler 1. W.W. Henry Co., Huntington Park, CA. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. F2 Broadloom Carpet 1. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 2. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom. — 3. Pile fiber: Nylon. 4. Style: Level loop. 5. Pile face weight: Minimum 32 ounces per square yard. — 6. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 7. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 8. Performance characteristics: a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): — (1) Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450. b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per square centimeter. — c. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. 03860396/98 CARPETING 09680 - 2 " 7 r' WAR FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX B. C. A 900-9330 d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours of exposure. g. Density: 5,000 minimum. F13 Vinyl Back Carpet (6' Broadloom) 1. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 2. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom. 3. Pile fiber: Nylon, solution dyed, antimicrobal. 4. Style: Level loop. 5. Pile face weight: Minimum 26 ounces per square yard. 6. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 7. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 8. Performance characteristics:. a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): (1) Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450. b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per square centimeter. c. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours of exposure. g. Density: 5,000 minimum. F10 - Modular Carpet (Tile) 1. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 2. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom. 3. Pile fiber: Nylon, solution dyed, antimicrobal 4. Style: Level loop. 5. Pile face weight: Minimum 26 ouhces per square yard. 6. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 7. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 8. Performance characteristics: a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): (1) Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450. b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per square centimeter. c. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours of exposure. g. Density: 5,000 minimum. Accessories 1. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix cementitious; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, smooth finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard. 7 03860396/98 CARPETING 09680 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1 /8 inch in 10 ft and are ready to receive work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. v 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other. defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to 'ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. E. Locate seams in area of least traffic. F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction, or as directed by manufacturer, for anticipated traffic. t H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. I. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. ' J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. K. Install edge guards at all exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. _ 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. 3.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 120 sq ft of carpeting F2/A in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. B. Provide 25 sq ft of carpeting F2/B in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 CARPETING 09680 - 4 r F FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK 900-9330 A. Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Pavement markings. B. Section 02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Pavement markings. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop preparation and priming of steel. D. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Shop preparation and priming of joists. E. Section 05312 - Steel Roof Deck: Shop preparation and priming of roof deck. F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces. G. Section 09800 - Special Coatings H. Section 15391 - Marking and Identification: Color schedule for equipment and piping• 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D1546 - Method for Performance Tests of Clear Floor Sealers. C. ASTM D1730 - Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Surfaces for Painting. D. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. E. ASTM D2486 - Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat Wall Paints. F. ASTM D3359 - Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. G. ASTM D3730 - Guide for Testing High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings. H. ASTM D4138 - Test Method for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means. I. ASTM D4258 - Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. J. ASTM D4261 - Surface Cleaning Concrete Masonry for Coating. K. ASTM D4262 - Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. L. ASTM D4263 - Test Methods for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. M. ASTM D4414 - Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. N. ASTM D4540 - Guide for Testing Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints. 0. Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Manual 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 1 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. ' C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to UBC and NFPA 101for Class II, and Class B respectively flame spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 26- 75/0-450. — 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificatels) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. — 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and ~ instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. r B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above t 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 D. degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. . B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as follows: No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Type 1. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 2. 1110 Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer Vinyl Toluene 3. 1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat 4. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish Alkyd 1. r 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Tyoe 5., 1370 Spraymaster DTG Alkyd -Flat 6. 1412 Ultra -Hide Enamel Acrylic -Latex, Eggshell 7. 1416 Ultra -Hide Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss 8. 1434r Ultra -Wall Enamel Latex, Low Lustre 9. 1482 Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB Latex -Eggshell 10. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel Alkyd, Semi -Gloss 11. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall Alkyd -Eggshell 12. 1600 Woodpride Stain Alkyd - Oil 13. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish Aquacrylic-Satin 14. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel Alkyd -Semi -Gloss 15. 3010 Ultra -Hide Block Filler Vinyl Acrylic 16. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler Acrylic 17. 4020 Devflex DTM Primer Acrylic 18. 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel Alkyd -Gloss 19. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 20. 4206 Devflex Acrylic Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss ` 21. 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy, Semi -Gloss No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore) Tvoe 1. 70 Kel-Guard Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Moisture Content 1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. ,r a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: `— a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 4 r r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. c. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Insulated Coverings a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 4. Concrete Floors a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. c. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved in accordance with ASTM D4262. d. Allow to dry. 5. Galvanized Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. c. Apply coat of etching primer. 6. Unit Masonry Surfaces a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261. c. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. f. Allow to dry. 7. Piaster Surfaces a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. c. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 8. Steel and Iron Surfaces a. Concealed Locations (1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. (2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. r' 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 5 1, FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 b. Exposed Locations (1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP7 - Brush -Off Blast. (2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 9. Interior Wood -- a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. , d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to recieve transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. 10. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces 1. All Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. b. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. C. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. d. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. e. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer. ` f. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. g. Clean surfaces with solvent. h. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's �- recommended level of preparation. 2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other _ Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: (1) At Contractor's option, -either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with procedures specified in this Section. (2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. ti (3) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance with requirements specified in this Section for unpainted surfaces. b. If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with requirements , specified in this Section, field prepare in accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above. C. Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up. 3.3 PROTECTION ti A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 6 /'' r J FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.4 APPLICATION 900-9330 A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork with primer paint. 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. C. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Color code equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Shop Primed Equipment 1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location. J. Shop Painted Equipment 1. Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as follows: a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to, mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers. ir" 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. B. Steel Surfaces 1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordance with ASTM D3359 (Method 8). C. Concrete Floors 1. Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546. D. Other Surfaces 1. Film Thickness a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent soilds and by percent solvent added. b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138. E. Scrubbability 1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486. F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540. G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM D3730. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Repair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness. B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified. C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.8 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.9 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE A. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat IDMFTI 3rd Coat (DMF) Ferrous Metals Bollards, 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Railings, Exposed Lintels, 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) Misc. Metal 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 8 '` I 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 ..r Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) r~ Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) and Equipment �,. Galvanized Metals 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) } Louvers Ducts 001. B. Interior Surfaces + Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Concrete Concrete Floors 700.0) 700.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 3010 Varies 1416 (1.4) 1416 (1.4) Room no. All 18 4000 4206 (2.5) 4206 (2.5) Metal Decking Primed 1582 1582 4 Ferrous Metals Bar Joists 4160 (2.0) 1582 (2.0) 1582 (2.0) & Beams k (Exposed) Doors and Frames, 4160(2.0) 1516 (2.0) 1516 (2.0) Railings, Equipment r` Galvanized Metal 4 Ducts, 1370 1582(2.0) 1582(2.0) Louvers, �., Piping, Conduit, t Outlet Boxes, Vents Gypsum Drywall Room no's. 1030 (1.1) 1210 1210 8132 Room no's. 3010 1434 0.5) 1434 (1.5) r, C126, C127 Room no's. 1030 (1.1) 4406 ( 4406 ( C122, C123, f D115 All other 1030 (1.1) 1416 0.5) 1416 (1.5) spaces. ('` 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 - 9 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX Surface Wood Drawer & Cabinet Interiors Transp. Finish. Cabinets, Ext. & Interiors Transp. Finish (Stained) Millwork Opaque Finish. Wood Doors Stained & Transp. Finish . 900-9330 _1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 25% 1600 Varies 1802 0.0) 1802 0.0) Thin 50% Thin 25% ' 1310 0.5) 1516 (1.4) 1516 (1.4) 1600 Varies 1802 0.0) 1802 0.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% END OF SECTION 03860396/98 PAINTING 09900 10 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings and special preparation of surfaces. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Substrate B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES 900-9330 A. FS TT-C-535 Coating, Epoxy, Two -Component, for Interior Use on Metal, Wood, Wallboard, Painted Surfaces, Concrete and Masonry. B. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Painting Manual, Volume 2. 1. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 4. SSPC-SP 7 - Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide coating systems that meet the following minimum performance criteria, unless more stringent criteria are specified: 1. Lead Content: None. 2. Scrubbability: Excellent. 3. Gloss and Color Retention: Excellent. B. Moderate Exposure: All minimum criteria: 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating coating materials and performance ratings. C. Submit three samples of manufacturer's standard color chart illustrating colors available for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and preparation requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and cleaning requirements for coatings and repair and patching techniques. 03860396/98 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section �- with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 MOCK-UP A. Section 01410 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements. B. Provide 1 mock-up, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating coating, color and surface sheen, for coating in Vehicle Maintenance Shop 115. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Preinstallation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. �.. B. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. _ C. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. .� D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. E. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Warranty: Include coverage for bond to substrate for a period of 2 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carboline Company. B. Tnemec Co., Inc.. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. „ 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi -coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. 1. Lead content: None. 2. Chrominum content, as zinc chromate or strontium chromate: None. 3. Maximum VOC content: As required by applicable regulations. 4. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 03860396/98 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -2 t"' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Epoxy Coating: Polyamide epoxy, semi -gloss finish. 1. Percentage of solids by volume: 58, minimum. C. Epoxy Floor Coating: Two-part, polyamide epoxy, gloss finish. 1. Percentage of solids by volume: 96, minimum. 2. Comply with the performance requirements specified above for moderate exposure. D. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise specified. E. Shellac: Pure, white type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of substrates. C. Cementitious Substrates: Do not begin application until substrate has cured 28 days minimum and measured moisture content is not greater than 16 percent. D. Verify that substrate surfaces are dry to manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 . PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal ' surface with shellac. C. Concrete Floors: Mechanically abrade to a 5 mil profile using equipment as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Ferrous Metal: 1. General a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: (1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in r" accordance with procedures specified in this Section. (2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. (3) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in ` accordance with requirements specified in this Section for unpainted surfaces. / b. If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with requirements specified in this Section, field prepare in accordance with paragraphs above. 2. Solvent clean. + 3. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using hand 4 tools according to SSPC-SP 2, power tools according to SSPC-SP 3, or by f blasting according to SSPC-SP 6 or -SP 7. E. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from overspray; mask if 1 necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. i; 4 03860396/98 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -3 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. B. Concrete: Prior to priming, patch with masonry filler to produce smooth surface. C. Apply coatings to thicknesses specified. . D. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color, :texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other �.. changes in dimension with full coating thickness. 3.4 CLEANING r A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. C. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. D. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. General: The schedule is based on the products of Tnemec. B. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Concrete Floor 201 (6-8) 283 (6-8) 282 (6-8) in first three bays of Vehicle Maintenance Shop 115 Ferrous Metals Exterior Stairs and 90-97 (2.5-3.5) 27 (4-6) 73 (2-3) Railings at Training Tower Exterior Awning frames 27 (4-6) 27 (4-6) 73 (2-3) over windows C. Colors: As selected by Architect. Provide floor markings of different color in Vehicle Maintenance Shop 115. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 900-9330 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal surfaced markerboards. B. Tackboards C. Trim, marker rail and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Substrate construction behind markerboards and tackboards. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Substrate construction behind markerboards and tackboards. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. B. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. APA - American Plywood Association. D. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. E. ASTM B209 - Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. G. ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative. H. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. I. FS LLL-B-810 - Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable Fiber. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame spread/smoke development ratings of for markerboards and tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations special anchor details. 2. Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. Include maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal. 3. Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color, and texture of markerboard trim and tackboard surfacing. 4. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 03860396/98 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide life time warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing, cracking or staining. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. B. Greensteel Division C. Best -Rite. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, 24 gage commercial quality. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ANSI/ASTM B221, 6061 alloy. C. Cork: Fine grain natural cork, homogeneous composition. D. Hardboard: FS LLL-B-810; tempered, smooth face. E. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet .002 inch thick. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Map Supports: Formed aluminum hooks (4 at each markerboard), sliding type to fit map rail. B. Provide 10 assorted markers and 2 erasers for each markerboard. 2.4 FABRICATION - MARKERBOARD A. Markerboards 1. Trim: 5/8" wide x 0.062" thick extruded aluminum alloy, clear satin anodized. 2. Chalktray: 2-5/8" deep extruded aluminum, with rounded and smooth polished ends; thru-bolted to writing surface board. 3. Writing Surface: 24 gage steel with baked -on porcelain enamel LCS surface to 3/8" thick particleboard core with foil back. 4. Size and Configuration: Scheduled on drawings. 5. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum, integral cork insert. 6. Mounting: 2-inch wide clip hangers at top and bottom at 24 inches on center. 7. Acceptable Product: Claridge; Series 4. B. Tackboards 1. Trim: 5/8" wide x 0.062" thick extruded aluminum alloy. 2. Tack Surface: Vinyl fabric covered, 3/8" thick backer board. 3. Size and Configuration: Scheduled on drawings. 4. Mounting: 2 inch wide clip hangers at top and bottom at 24 inches on center. 5. Acceptable Product: Claridge; Series 4, with Fabricork surface on 3/8" Duracore. 03860396/98 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2.5 FRAME AND TRIM A. Frame: Extruded aluminum, concealed fasteners; one piece map rail with cork insert over markerboard surfaces. B. Marker Trough: Extruded aluminum, ribbed profile; one piece, full length of markerboard; concealed fasteners; rounded and polished ends. 2.6 FINISHES A. Markerboard Surface: Color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. B. Tackboard Surface: Color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. C. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear anodized aluminum, satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.2 3.3 A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction. INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Butt markerboard panels to tackboards tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. CLEANING A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover markerboard and tackboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION r 03860396/98 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS k 10100 - 3 ram, 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 10165 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic laminate toilet compartments. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members. B. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment support. C. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Wood Particleboard. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. C. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape and Tube. D. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates. E. NBS PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Floor mounted and overhead braced partition system. 1.6 SUBMITTAL A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two 2 x 3 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. {- 03860396/98 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165 - 1 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Accurate Partitions Corp.. B. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.. C. Flush Metal Partition Corp.. D. Global Steel Products Corp.. E. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements 2.2 MATERIALS A. Particleboard for Core: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-H-2, with waterproof resin binder; sanded faces. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3 High pressure melamine laminate, General Purpose Type 0.050 inch thick. C. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water resistant contact type. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel with NO. 4 finish. E. Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5. F. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. G. Steel Plate Reinforcement: Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1 /8 inch thick. H. Hardware: [Polished] [Satin] [chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal] [stainless steel]. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters — 1. Plastic laminate covered adhesive applied and pressure bonded to faces and edges of particleboard core, with beveled corners and edges; edges of cut-outs sealed. 2. Reinforce pilasters with steel plate sandwiched in particleboard core at attachment points. Router cut openings as required. 3. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch 2. Door Width: 24 inch 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch, out -swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch C. Pilaster Dimensions 1. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch 2. Height: 72 inch D. Pilaster Shoe: 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. E. Head Rails: Hollow tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profiles and cast socket wall brackets. Fabricate headrails in continuous lengths without joints. .� F. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard cast metal, 'U' shaped type will all anchoring holes cast in bracket. G. Pivot Hinges: Gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door with " nylon bearings. H. Door Latch: Thumb turn type with exterior emergency access feature. I. Door Strike and Keeper: Fabricate with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. J. Coat Hook: Fabricate with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 03860396/98 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165 - 2 "' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 2.4 FINISHES A. Plastic Laminate: Color as selected by Architect. B. Hardware: Polished chrome -plated non-ferrous cast metal. C. Headrails: Satin clear anodized aluminum. D. Pilaster Shoes: Formed stainless steel with satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 900-9330 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1 /2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. D. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. E. Provide continuous channel brackets at walls. F. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01410 - Quality Control: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1 /4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 /8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partially opened into stall position when unlatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. 3.5 SCHEDULES A Provide plastic laminate toilet compartments in all toilet rooms as indicated on the drawings and not scheduled to receive plastic toilet and shower compartments specified in Section 10170 - PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 10170 PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments and shower compartments. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment support. B. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Shape and Tube. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of wall support framing and anchors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Capital Partitions Inc. B. Comtec Industries. C. Twice Limited. D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. E. Product Description: Floor mounted overhead braced partitions. 03860396/98 PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor - mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch 2. Door Width: 24 inch 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch, out -swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch C. Pilasters 1. Thickness: 1-1 /4 inch. 2. Height: 72 inch. j 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: ASTM B221, hollow clear anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: ASTM B221, satin clear anodized aluminum. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Satin stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Door Latch: Manufacturer's standard slide or drop arm type. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 6. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. _ B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1 /2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 03860396/98 PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 2 "� f FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES 900-9330 A. Section 01410 - Quality Control: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1 /4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 /8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Provide plastic toilet compartments in the following spaces: 1. WOMEN'S TOILET 8113. 2. MEN'S TOILET B116. B. Provide plastic shower compartments in the following spaces: 1. WOMEN'S SHOWER B112. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 PLASTIC TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 3 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX i SECTION 10210 METAL WALL LOUVERS 900-9330 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed louvers and frames. B. Bird screening. C. Blank out sheeting. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting. D. Section 13121 - Pre -Engineered Buildings: Prepared exterior wall opening. E. Division 15 Section: Ductwork attachment to louver. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AMCA 500 (Air Movement Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) _Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ASTM Al53 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM A740 - Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fabric). G. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Fixed Louver Section 1. Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity of [500) [7501 [1000) ft/min without blade vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.10 inches. 2. Fabricate louver to permit 45 percent free area. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three years experience. �"` 03860396/98 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions and tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screening; and frames. 2. Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finishes. 3. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with installation of unit masonry and metal wall panels. B. Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS ._ 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cesco Products, Minneapolis, MN. B. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.; Cincinatti, OH. C. Ruskin Manufacturing, Grandview, MO. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, factory primed for field. painting. B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A283, galvanized to G60 zinc coating. C. Fasteners and Anchors: ASTM A307, galvanized steel type. D. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of galvanized steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1 /2 inch open weave, square design. E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard baked on type. F. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame. G. Sealants: Type specified in Section 07900. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Louver Size: 4 or 6 inches deep, face measurements as indicated or required to cover cavity between wythes of walls. B. Louver Blade Design: 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, sloped at 45 degrees; K-style; integral waterstops on blade. C. Louver Frame 1. 18 gage galvanized steel channel shaped with welded corner joints. 2. Sections to mesh tightly to form rigid waterproof mullion with no exposed fasteners. D. Sill Flashings: One piece per louver, roll formed to shape indicated on drawings or if not indicated as required in conformance with SMACNA Plate 139, Figure B. E. Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced corner construction; screw to louver frame. F. Blank Out Sheeting: Same material as louver and frame. 03860396/98 METAL WALL LOUVERS '10210 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2.4 FINISHES A. Exterior Surfaces: Shop coat of primer for field painting. B. Interior Surfaces: Shop coat of primer for field painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the louver manufacturer. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners. D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from fiashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Install bird screening to interior of louver. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement with actual control; lubricate operating joints. B. Clean surfaces and components. 03860396/98 END OF SECTION METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 10260 WALL GUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall guards. B. Corner guards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry: In -wall supports. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Installed wallguards and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs. at any point without damage or permanent set. B. Install corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 Ibs at any point without permanent damage. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for wall guards and corner guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. Incorporate schedule indicating locations for different size wallguards located on the same wall. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Samples 1. Submit two sections each of wall guard and corner guard 24 inches long illustrating component design, configuration, color and finish. D. Installation Instructions 1. Indicate installation rough -in measurements and instructions. E. Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 03860396/98 WALL GUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Muncy, PA. B. Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI. -- 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Wall Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .110 inch thick x height scheduled on drawings 2. Brackets: .093 inch thick, 2 inch long extruded aluminum. 3. Cushion: Continuous vinyl cushion nested in continuous aluminum extrusion. 4. End Caps: Preformed, radiused type, color to match rail. 5. Corners: One piece, preformed type internal and external corners, color to match rail. 6. Finish: Matte finish, pebble grain texture on all exposed surfaces, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 7. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties models SCR-40 and SCR-64. _ B. Corner Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick, 3 inch wide with 1 /4 inch corner radius. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 4. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 5. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model SM-20.' C. Accessories 1. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2. Vinyl Cove Base Support: Manufacturer's standard rigid aluminum. _ 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for attachment. C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 03860396/98 WALL GUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 2 Im FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Install wall guards at 33 inches from finished floor. C. Terminate wall guards maximum 1 inch short of door frames. D. Position corner guard flush with finished floor, extend to 48 inches high. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Wall Guards 1. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1 /4 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Level For Visible Length: 1 /4 inch 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Wall Guards: 1. Supply Issue: North wall 2. Parts Storage: North and East wall 3. Vehicle Maintenance Shop: South wall as indicated on drawings. B. Corner Guards: Install corner guards at external corners in all Corridors, Dormitory A112, Women's Lockers B111, Men's Lockers B117 and Exercise B137. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 WALL GUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 3 F I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural floor supported pedestal framing system. B. Removable floor panels. C. System electrostatic grounding. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Wall base at floor periphery. B. Section 09680 - Carpet: Panel covering. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Sealing of concrete floor. D. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Attachment of grounding conductors to building grounding system. E. Section 16110 - Raceways and Fittings: Electrical raceways. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association - Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors. C. NFPA 75 - Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment. D. UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install access flooring to comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing of manufacturer's corresponding stock systems per test methods specified or, if not specified, manufacturer's standard method. B. Structural Performance per CISCA/AF: Provide access flooring capable of supporting the following loads, within limits and under conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing according to applicable procedure in Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) 'Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors' referenced elsewhere in this section as CISCA/AF: 1. Floor panels a. Full Load: including those with cutouts, capable of supporting concentrated design load of 750 Ibf. with a bottom surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 inch and 0.010 inch, measured below each applied load location at the horizontal surface of the nearest composite beam. b. Flame Spread: 26/75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 03860396/98 ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. Pedestal Assemblies: Capable of withstanding the following types of loads per pedestal, without panels or other supports in place. a. Overturning moment of 1,000 inch -pounds. b. Axial load of 5,000 lbs. 3. Stringers: Capable, without panels in place, of supporting a concentrated ,load of 200 Ibf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.10 inch. 4. Flooring System: Ultimate concentrated load capable of supporting, without failure, not less than twice the specified concentrated design load on floor panels. Failure is defined as the point at which access flooring system will not take any additional load. C. Surface Electrical Resistance: Maximum 1 ohm per panel. 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. System: Rigid grid system. B. Access flooring system to achieve finished floor elevation 8 inches nominal height above building structural floor. C. Floor Panel Size: 24 x 24 inches 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate floor layout, interruptions to grid, panels requiring drilling or cut-out for services, appurtenances or interruptions and edge details. 2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard printed descriptive data for grid system, panels, and accessories; electrical resistance characteristics and ground connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Design floor system structure layout for this project under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UBC for flame resistance of panels and NEC for electrical ground resistance. B. Electrical Grounding Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Panel Lifting Devices: One of manufacturer's standard type. 0- 03860396198 ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 2 i r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Atlantic Access Flooring. fi B. Maxcess Technologies, Inc. C. Tate Access Floors, Inc. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. r 2.2 SUPPORT COMPONENTS i A. Pedestals: Steel with flat bottom base plate, threaded supporting rod, vibration proof lock nut to permit 1-1 /2 inch adjustment, manufacturer's standard finish. B. Frame Grid Stringers: Snap -on type, consisting of steel channels, box, or tee sections. r" 2.3 PANEL COMPONENTS f A. Floor Panels: �.., 1. Die formed steel top and bottom plates; steel reinforcement stiffeners. B. Panel Edge: Vinyl trim mechanically locked to panels. C. Floor Panel Finish Adhesive: Moisture resistant, electrically conductive type recommended by floor finish manufacturer. ,-r P " 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Electrostatic Grounding Connectors: Solid copper. B. Cable Cutout Protection: Extruded polyvinyl chloride edging, Closed cell neoprene sheet, self -extinguishing. C. Gaskets: Closed cell sponge rubber, preformed to suit. +-g D. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900. 2.5 FINISHES A. Floor Panel Finish: 1. Exposed Metal Surfaces: Baked enamel finish; color as selected by Architect from r manufacturer's standard. 2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inch in any direction. B. Floor Panel Width or Length From Specified Size: Plus or minus 0.02 inch. C. Floor Panel Squareness: Pius or minus 0.03 inch difference between opposite diagonal r- dimensions. r— PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. D. Verify that concrete floor has been sealed as specified in Section 09900. r 03860396/98 ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.2 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean concrete subfloor and remove all laitenance which will interfere with installation of pedestal bases. B. Adjust unlevel floor conditions by grinding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. , B. Secure pedestal base plate to subfloor with adhesive. ` C. Install additional pedestals where grid pattern is interrupted by room appurtenances or at cut-outs. D. Install stringers and floor panels on pedestals with full bearing. E. Close field cut floor panels with edge trim. F. Cut holes, as directed by Architect, in floor panels to accommodate Owner's equipment. Provide cable cut-out protection at each hole. --. G. Provide positive electrical earth grounding of entire floor assembly in accordance with NFPA 75. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Out of Level Floor Panel Tolerance: 1 /16 inch in 10 ft, non -cumulative. B. Gap Between Panels: 1 /32 inch. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust pedestals to achieve a level floor and to assure adjacent floor panel surfaces are flush. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. ; B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION -03860396/98 ACCESS FLOORING 10270 - 4 "' l LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 i SECTION 10350 r FLAGPOLES PART 1 -GENERAL f 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS t A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. {{ 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: - 1. A. Flagpoles: 1. Location of flagpole is shown on drawings. B. Flagpole fittings and accessories. C. Flagpole is add Alternate Number One. See Section 01031. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Earthwork: Division 2. r B. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3. 1.4 REFERENCES T7 A. AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980. i B. ASTM B 241 /B 241 M-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 1993. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide flagpole and anchorage system to comply with the following requirements: k 1. Flagpole with flag flying: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent deformation, when flying appropriately sized flag. 2. Flagpole without flag: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent ! deformation. 3. Safety design factor: 2.5. Vr 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of flagpole required. Include data for fittings and r- accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings bearing the stamp of a professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. Include the following: 1. Configuration of flagpoles and bases. 2. Details showing jointing, anchorage, and support systems. 3. Substantiation of compliance with performance requirements indicated in contract documents. 4. Flagpole finishes, fittings, and accessories. f I' 03860396/98 FLAGPOLES 10350-1 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. _ B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. B. Provide suitable protection for each flagpole before shipment. Spiral -wrap pole with heavy •— kraft paper or polyethylene material and place pole in hard protective tube. C. Deliver flagpoles and accessories properly labeled and in original wrappings. D. Store and handle materials in a manner which will prevent damage prior to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ` A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Aabec Pole Division/Morgan-Francis Company, Inc. 2. Acme Flagpole Division/Lingo, Inc. 3. American Flagpole Division/Kearney-National, Inc. _ 4. Baartol Company, Inc. 5. Concord Industries, Inca 6. EMC Division/Eder Manufacturing Corporation. 7. John Ewing & Company, Inc. 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Description: 1. Mounting: Ground -set, embedded. 2. Type: Conventional. 3. Shaft metal: Aluminum. 4. Shaft form: Cone tapered. 5. Exposed length of flagpole: 25 feet 6. Halyard: Internal. ` 7. Flag: a. American flag _ b. 4 by 6 C. 100 percent nylon 2.3 FABRICATION _ A. Fabrication - General: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit fabricated by a single manufacturer, including base, anchorage devices, fittings, and accessories as necessary for proper installation. ` B. Fabricate and ship flagpole as a single unit, unless shipping contraints preclude this alternative. Where flagpole size dictates shipment in more than one section, provide 03860396/98 FLAGPOLES 10350-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 self -aligning internal sleeve composed of metal compatible with shaft metal and properly �. designed to allow precise, weathertight joining during installation. C. Flagpole Diameter and Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of shaft and ratio of top diameter to ` butt diameter must be appropriate for metal or alloy used and for length of flagpole. r D. Joints and Seams: Form joints and seams which are inconspicuous. 1. Exposed welds: Grind exposed welds smooth. Finish to match flagpole p p shaft. E. Aluminum Shaft: 1. Seamless extruded tube: Comply with ASTM B 241. 2. Alloy: 6063-T6. 3. Minimum wall thickness: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum tensile strength: 30,000 psi. 5. Minimum yield point: 25,000 psi. 6. After flagpole is fabricated, heat-treat and artificially age to alter temper of aluminum. i 7. Shaft finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M32C22A41 (medium satin directional textured mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; clear, architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). i F. Ground -Set Flagpole - Embedded Type: 1. Provide flagpole of sufficient overall length to allow setting depth which is not less fi than 10 percent of exposed length. k 2. Flash collar: Fabricate from same metal used for flagpole shaft. a. Product: Selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards based on r. availability for shaft size. 3. Foundation sleeve: Corrugated galvanized steel tube, 16 gage. 4. Foundation sleeve plate: Square steel plate welded to bottom of foundation sleeve. a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 4 inches larger than inside diameter of foundation sleeve. b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch. 5. Steel centering wedges: Minimum 1/8-inch-thick wedges, welded to sleeve plate inside foundation sleeve for the purpose of centering pole. 6. Electrical grounding spike: 3/4-inch steel spike, welded to bottom side of sleeve plate. r., a. Length of extension below concrete foundation: Not less than thickness of concrete footing below sleeve plate. 7. Foundation support plate: Square steel plate welded to electrical grounding spike at base of concrete foundation. a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 6 inches. b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch. G. Fittings: 1. Truck: j a. Truck designed for internal halyard system. 2. Halyards: �,.. a. Internal type: 1. Cable: Stainless steel, with vinyl- or neoprene -covered weight. 4 2. Winch: Direct drive type, internally mounted, with control stop to hold flag in any position on pole. 3. Winch crank: Removable. 4. Winch access door: Flush -mounted, with cylinder lock. 3. Flag snaps: j• ' a. Number required: Two flag snaps per halyard. ' b. Material: Bronze, manufacturer's standard. C. Sheaths: Provide heavy vinyl or neoprene sheath for each flag snap. i 03860396198 FLAGPOLES 10350-3 r� d LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 900-9330 A. Provide materials for concrete flagpole foundations as specified in Division 3, 3,000 psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Ground -Set Flagpole: Verify that foundation is in suitable condition to receive flagpole. C. Do not begin flagpole installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: 1. Bituminous coating: Apply protective coating of bituminous paint to section of flagpole which will be installed below grade, if not factory -applied by flagpole manufacturer prior to shipment. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Flagpole Foundation: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3. B. Flagpole Installation -General: Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings as indicated in contract documents and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install flagpole in erect, plumbed position. D. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: Erect flagpole in foundation sleeve and plumb as necessary using hardwood wedges. Pour dry sand into foundation sleeve in successive layers, each layer 6 inches thick. Tamp each layer before adding next layer. When last sand layer is '— placed, provide moisture seal over sand by applying sealant of proper thickness. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 7. E. Electrical Grounding: Provide positive lightning ground suitable for flagpole and installation conditions. F. Field Joints: Provide snug -fitting, weathertight, hairline joints. 1. Field welding of aluminum flagpole is not acceptable. G. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb position (90 degrees from horizontal plane): 1 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean surfaces. B. Verify smooth and proper operation of all installed fittings. Adjust as necessary. END OF SECTION 10350 03860396/98 FLAGPOLES 10350-4 i p' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 10400 r IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements 4 apply to Work of this Section. .-- 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES t A. Metal letters for exterior building signs. B. Interior signs. rC. Fasteners. y; 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Substrate surface. B. Section 09250 - Gypsumboard Systems: Substrate surface. r-, t 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ASTM B 26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings C. ASTM B 108 - Aluminum -Alloy Permanent Mold Castings 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of specialty signs. 2. Include plans, elevations and large scale details of sign wording and lettering layout. 3. Show anchorages and accessory items. 4. Furnish location template drawings for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers supported or anchored to permanent construction. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required. C. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacture and design of each sign component. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity of Manufacturer: Furnish products of a single manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to 36 CFR Part 1191 for location, mounting height and braille. ry 03860396/98 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. C. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Exterior Signage 1. Nelson -Harkins Industries. -- 2. Southwell Company. B. Interior Signage 1. APCO Graphics. 2. ASI Sign Systems. 3. Daktronics, Inc. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: Alloy and temper as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of use indicated and finish specified. B. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Cast methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F and of the following general types: . 1. Opaque Sheet: Colored acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from manufacturer's standard. 2. Transparent Sheet: Matte finish high impact clear acrylic. C. Plastic Laminate: High pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations as selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Exterior Signage 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Letter style: Helvetica medium. 4. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. 5. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. 6. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. B. Plaques 1. . Metal: Cast aluminum. 2. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. 3. Comply with requirements indicated for size and lettering. 4. Border Style: Single line beveled edge. 5. Background a. Texture: Leatherette b. Color: Black. 03860396/98 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Interior Signage 1. Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; lettering engraved through face to expose core color: 2. Face Color: Clear matte finish acrylic. 3. Core Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 4. Total Thickness: 1 /8 inch. C` 5. Height: As indicated in paragraph SCHEDULE. 6. Edges: Radiused. 7. Character Font: Helvetica 7/8 inch high, reverse engraved. r-� B. Fabricate office signs with engraved room number and removable insert with occupants name. 9. Fabricate room signs with room name and number only. .- 10. Fabricate all signs with engraved braille or raised braille applique as required by 36 1 CFR Part 1191. �-, 2.4 ACCESSORIES { A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. i PART 3 EXECUTION r- 3.1 INSTALLATION s A. Exterior Signage 1. Use fastening methods as indicated for letter form, type of mounting, wall t construction and condition of exposure indicated. 2. Provide heavyweight paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 3. Mounting: Solid wall mounting method with less than 1 /4" projection for letters. Letters to be 3/8" thick. B. Plaque 1. Use fastening methods as indicated for type of wall construction and condition of exposure indicated. 2. Use solid wall mount with manufacturer's standard rosette for exposed anchoring studs. C. Interior Signage i 1. Use tape adhesive type of mounting. 2. Install signs after doors and wall surfaces are finished, in locations as directed. 3. Center sign on door surface, level except as otherwise indicated. 4. Locate sign on wall surface, level. r- 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCE A. Maximum variation from plumb: 1 /16 inch. B. Maximum variation from level: 1 /16 inch. ell 03860396/98 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Office Signs: Height as required with 7/8 inch high letters. Exact title to be provided by Owner. Provide signs at following locations: 1. , B121, B122, B123, B124, B138, C104, C105, C106, C109, C110, C113, C116, C117, C118, C119, C120, D108, D113, D114, D116, D117, D118, D120, D121, D122, D123 and D124. 2. Maintenance Building: 110, 111. B. Room Signs: 2 inch high sign with 7/8 inch high letters. Exact title to be provide by Owner. Provide signs at following locations: 1. 6111, 13117, B120, B125, 13126(2), B127, 6129(2), 13133, 13134, B135, 6136(2), B137, C121, C122, C126, D109, D110, D115, D119, D126, D128 and D133. 2. Maintenance Building: 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 114. C. Rest Room Door Graphic: 6 inches high, engraved "MALE" and "FEMALE" name and graphic image; located on rest room doors as indicated on drawings. D. Area Signs: 1. Provide area designation signs of height and width required for wall space provided. 2. Exact title to be provided by Owner. 3. Provide signs at following locations and of following general wording: a. Entry Lobby side of door C13A to read FIRE ADMINISTRATION. _ b. Entry Lobby side of door D07 to read FIRE MARSHALL. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 10500 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS t, PART 1 GENERAL a. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. ►-•, 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Locker units with hinged doors. B. Edge trim moldings. C. Hooks, latches, and hardware. D. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS �s A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Alternates r B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete bases. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood grounds and nailing strips. D. Section 08700 - Hardware: Padlocks r1.4 ALTERNATES A. Under Alternate no. 7?, provide one half of lockers in Apparatus Bay, room #A118. k i F 1.5 REFERENCES r A. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. B. Mil-M-17194C - Metal, Expanded Steel. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate locker types, sizes, configurations, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, trim and numbering plan. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. E.-- C. Samples 1. Provide two samples, 3 x 6 inches, of manufacturer's full range of colors, on actual base material for selection by Architect. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 6 A. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation. PART PRODUCTS p r 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS r- 03860396/98 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10500 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 A. American Locker Security Systems, Inc. B. Art Metal Products Division/Fort Knox Storage C. List Industries, Inc. D. Penco Products, Inc. E. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Mild, cold -rolled, stretcher leveled steel. 1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage. 2. Doors: 16 gage. 3. Door Frames: 16 gage. 4. Sloping Top: 22 gage. '- 5. Trim: 22 gage. B. Expanded Metal Mesh: 13 gage steel complying with Mil-M-17194C, Type II, Class 1 with 3/4 x 1 3/4 inch openings. Total open area approximately 75 percent. C. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel -plated steel with self locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. D. Hinges: 14 gage, 5 knuckle, non -removable pins, loop style, minimum 2 inches high E. Door Handles: Chrome plated die-cast zinc alloy or steel. F. Accessories 1. Coat Hooks: Cadmium -plated or zinc plated steel. 2. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Provide end panels and trim pieces to close off all openings. 2. Grind all welds exposed to view flush with surface. 3. Finish edges smooth without burrs. 4. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on front of locker doors or frames. 5. Provide number plates and number lockers consecutively beginning with "1 " in each space. 6. Door Handle: Recessed type with latch, lifter and padlock eye as one integral unit. 7. Locking Mechanism: Three point, positive automatic locking, capable of being locked before closing. 8. Number Plates: Raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8 inch high. Fasten to doors, centered near top, with two fasteners. 9. Factory fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping. 10. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces. B. Solid Body Lockers 1. Bodies and Shelf: 24 gage sheet steel, formed and flanged with stiffener ribs; electrically spot welded. 2. Door Frame: 16 gage sheet steel, formed channel shape, welded to body. 3. Doors: 16 gage sheet steel, 1 3/16 inch thickness; channel reinforced sides and 90 degree flanged top and bottom with minimum of three ventilation louvers at top and bottom of each door. 4. Sloping Top: 22 gage sheet steel, slope at 1:3 ratio. Fabricate hips, valleys and end closures with concealed fasteners. 5. Trim a. 22 gage sheet steel, with concealed fasteners. b. Recessed Lockers: Two piece male/female type with integral backbend to rest against adjacent construction. 6. Hinges: Weld securely to unit body and concealed rivet to inside of door flange. 03860396/98 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10500 - 2 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 7. Size and Configuration: As scheduled in Paragraph 3.4 - SCHEDULE. C. Expande Metal Lockers r. 1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum. 2. Legs: Extend vertical frame members or attach gusset -type legs of not less than 14 gage steel sheet. 3. Tops: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 4. Bottoms: Expanded metal mesh. 5. Expanded metal sides and vertical dividers: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 6. Backs: Expanded metal mesh. 7. Doors: Expanded metal mesh. 8. Door handles: Standard type. ,... 9. Weld edges of expanded metal to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center. Enclose sharp edges with frame. 2.4 FINISHES A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with two coats of baked enamel. B. Paint locker doors and bodies in color as selected from manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify bases and recesses are properly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers secure, plumb, square, and in line. Set on prepared base provided. i B. Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered. C. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. F D. Install end panels and trim to completely close off openings. 1 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING rA. Touch up minor scratches with matching paint furnished by locker manufacturer. B. Lockers with large or multiple scratches shall be replaced. 3.4 SCHEDULE ROOM LOCKER TYPE SIZE (W x D x H) k Apparatus Bay Single tier, expanded metal 18 x 24 x 72 Women's Lockers Single tier, solid body 18 x 18 x 72 Men's Lockers Dressing END OF SECTION 03860396/98 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10500 - 3 f, r r- r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. B. Fire Extinguishers C. Accessories 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Roughed -in wall openings. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, and details. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data. a. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re -certification requirements. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Brackets 1. J. L. Industries, Bloomington, Minnesota. 03860396/98 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1 1900-9330 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minnesota. 3. Potter-Rommer, Inc., Cerritos, Calif. B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers 1. Fire Class: A,B,C 2. Type: Dry Chemical 3. Capacity: 5 pounds 4. Range: 15 feet 5. UL Rating: 2A 10BC 6. Shell Material: Enameled Steel 7. Weight: 18lbs. B. Cabinets 1. Formed 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, semi -recessed type, size to accommodate extinguishers. 2. Trim: Maximum %. inch return to wall surface, 1 '/. inch wide face, extruded aluminum tempered glass.. 3. Door: Clear acrylic convex bubble with extruded aluminum frame., clear anodized ..� finish. 4. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard as required to fit extinguisher specified 2.3 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. D. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. 2.4 FINISHES A. Extinguishers: Red enamel. B. Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. C. Cabinet and Door Frame: Clear anodized finish. D. Brackets: Red enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets 1. Install one cabinet at each location noted FEC on drawings. 2. Install plumb and level in wall openings. 03860396/98 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES r10522 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 3. Mounting height from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet as detailed on drawings. 4. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brackets 1. Install one bracket at each location noted FEB on drawings. 2. Install plumb and level. 3. Mounting height from finished floor in accordance with NFPA 10. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Cabinets 1. FEC: Install one fire extinguisher in each cabinet. B. Brackets 1. Install one I fire extinguisher at each bracket location. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3 e FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 r s SECTION 10651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS f~ PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes folding panel, acoustic partition; ceiling track, ceiling guards, and operating hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Overhead track structural support framing. 2. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood blocking and track support shimming. 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Acoustic barrier placed between top of partition track and roof deck above. 4. Section 09510 - Acoustic Ceilings: Adjacent ceiling finish. 5. Section 09680 - Carpeting: Product requirements for carpet floor finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Shape and Tube. B. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Airborne -Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. F. ASTM E557 - Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions. G. ASTM E596 - Laboratory Measurement of Noise Reduction of Sound -Isolating Enclosures. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Classification (STC): As specified, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests performed in accordance with ASTM E90, on partition size of 100 sq ft. 1.4- SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300 —Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, track layout, details of track and required �. supports, static and dynamic loads, location and details of pass door and frame, adjacent construction and finish trim, and stacking sizes. C. Product Data: Submit data on partition operation, hardware and accessories, colors and finishes available. rD. Samples for Review: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 x 12 inches size, illustrating quality, colors selected, texture, and weight. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions 7 requiring special attention and installation sequence. j F. Certificates: Certify that partition system meets or exceeds specified acoustic requirements. r^ I l 03860396/98 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to surfaces and hardware finish. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hufcor, Inc. 2. Modernfold, Inc. 3. Panelfold, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. — 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Partition Construction: Side opening; paired continuous hinged panels; side stacking with fabric cover over tackable substrate. 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum of 49. 2. Operation: Manual. 3. Finish: Field painted vinyl. B. Panels: 1. Panel Substrate Facing: ASTM C36, Gypsum Board, steel, % inch thick. -- 2. Panel Frame: 16 gage formed sheet steel frame top, bottom, jambs, and intermediates; welded construction, internally reinforced at suspension points, with acoustical insulation fill. _ 3. Thickness With Finish: 3 inches. 4. Trim: Trimmed with. 5. Hinges: Continuous type, 18 gage stainless steel. 6. Panel to Panel Seals: Continuous flexible ribbed vinyl seal fitted to panel '— edge construction; color to match panel finish. C. Track: Extruded aluminum; 1-1 /4 x 1-1 /4 inches size; thickness and profile designed to support loads with maximum deflection of 1 /360 of span; with manufacturer's standard track connectors. D. Carriers: Ball bearing, steel wheels on trolley carrier at top of every panel, sized to carry imposed loads, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment. E. Hardware: Latching door handle of cast steel, satin chrome finish. F. Acoustic Seals: Flexible acoustic seals at jambs, meeting mullions, retractable floor and ceiling seals. G. Accessories: White enameled ceiling closure and aluminum jamb molding, fittings and attachments. 03860396/98 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 -2 i r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 H. Pass Door: Single, [ l inch wide x [ l inch high opening; same design and construction as panel; fit door with perimeter acoustic gaskets, tool operated floor seal, and flush turn latch. I. Acoustic Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING A. Exposed Frame Members: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish of color as selected by Architect. B. Fabric: 100 percent polyolefin woven fabric from same dye lot, treated to resist stains, color as selected by Architect. Factory installed; flame/smoke rating of 25/50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Tackable Substrate: Natural, light brown, fine grained cork, 3/8 inch thick; adhesively applied, in full contact with panel substrate facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify track supports are laterally braced and will permit track to be level within 1 /4 inch of required position and parallel to the floor surface. D. Verify floor flatness of 1 /8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative. E. Verify wall plumbness of 1 /8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install operable panel partition in accordance with ASTM E 557 and panel partition manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fit and align partition assembly level and plumb. C. Lubricate moving components. D. Apply acoustic sealant to achieve required acoustic performance. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust partition assembly to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. Do not over -compress acoustic seals. C. Visually inspect partition in full extended position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical leak. D. Adjust partition assembly to achieve lightproof seal. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Clean finish surfaces and partition accessories. END OF SECTION r" 03860396/98 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 3 a FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and bath accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry: In wall blocking and framing for support of accessories. B. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile: Wall finish. C. Section 10165 - Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments: Supporting construction. D. Section 10170 - Plastic Toilet and Shower Compartments: Supporting Construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to 36 CFR Part 1190 for location and mounting height of accessories. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. r B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from C Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. i G. ANSI/ASTM 8456 - Electrode posited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. H. ASTM A500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel rStructural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. ANSI/BHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. J. FS CID A-A-2380 Dispenser, Paper Towel. K. FS L-C-780 Curtain, Shower and Window, Plastic. C L. FS DD-M-00411 Mirrors, Glass. M. FS WW-D-1908 Dispenser, Toilet Paper, Cabinet. r N. FS WW-H-1911 Holder, Toilet Paper (Single Roll). !, 0. FS WW-P-541 Plumbing Fixtures (Accessories, Land Use) (Detail Specification). +^ i 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install grab bars, and shower seats in conformance with structural strength requirements of 36 CFR 1191 without damage to supporting structure or finishes. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data _ 1. Provide schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes and installation locatioon by room for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples of each component illustrating color and finish. 1.8 KEYING A. Supply 6 keys to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING. A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; North Hollywood, CA. B. Bradley Corporation; Menomonee Falls, WI. C. McKinney/Parker; Scranton, PA. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. _ B. Exposed Sheet Steel: ASTM A525. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Tubing: ASTM A500, stainless steel. E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality q1 —' mirror select; 1 /4 inch thick minimum. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. H. Primer: Zinc Chromate. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541 /8B (Am.1), Type IV, Class 2, Form and length as indicated in schedule at end of this Section. 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. Acceptable products a. Form a: Bradley #8120-00 length as indicated on drawings. b. Shower Bar: Bradley #8120-036. B. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTDWR) 1. Conformance a. Paper Towel Dispenser: CID A-A-2380, Type III. b. Waste Receptacle: FS WW-P-541 /8B (Am.1), Type II, Style R (semi - recessed), open top, stainless steel removable type. 2. Capacity. a. Paper Towel Dispenser: 350 C-fold or 400 multi -fold towels. b. Waste Receptacle: Minimum 1.6 cubic foot. 3. Size: Complete unit approximately 14-inches wide, 4-inches deep and 56 inches tall. 4. Acceptable product: Bradley 2252. C. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD) 1. Conformance: CID A-A-2380, Type III. 2. Capacity a. Type I: 400 C fold or 525 multi -fold towels. b. Type II: 200 C fold or 350 multi -fold towels. 3. Size: Approximately 11 inches wide, 4 inches deep and 15-1 /4 inches tall. a. Type I: 15-1 /4 inches tall. b. Type II: 8 inches tall. 4. Acceptable product: a. Type I: Bradley #250. b. Type II: Bradley #252. D. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541/8, Type I, Style S (surface mounted), stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 10-3/4-inches wide, 4-inches deep and 15-1 /8-inches tall. a. Surface Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, 4" deep & 15-1 /8" tall. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #4722-15. E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD) 1. Conformance: FS WW-D-1908A, Type ll, stainless steel, semi -recessed mounting at walls and surface mounted -dual roll at partitions. 2. Size: Approximately 7-5/8" wide x 5-1/4" deep and 12-3/8" tall for semi - recessed model and 5-5/8" wide x 5-1/4" deep x 10-3/8" tall for surface mounted model. 3. Acceptable product: a. Semi -recessed: Bradley #5412. b. Surface mounted dual roll: Bradley #5402. F. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Type: Vertical stainless steel tank, liquid type. 2. Size: Approximately 5-inches wide, 3-inches deep and 8-inches tall. 3. Acceptable Product: Bradley #6562. G. Shower Curtain Rods (SR) 1. Conformance: A156.16, L08101, 1 1/4 inch diameter, 18 gauge stainless steel curtain rod with matching flanges for concealed attachment to wall. 2. Acceptable product: Bradley #9539. H. Anti -Bacterial Shower Curtain (SC) 1. Conformance: FS L-C-780. 2. 10 oz. Nylon -reinforced anti -bacterial vinyl fabric with hemmed edges, flameproof, stain resistant and self -deodorizing, with stainless steel grommets on 6" centers through top hem. Furnish in white. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #9535. r" 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 I. Shower Curtain Hooks (SH) 1. Chrome plated or stainless steel spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate curtain rod size specified above. -- 2. Acceptable product: Bradley #9536. J. Mirrors (M) 1. Conformance: FS.DD-M-411C, Class 1, Style A, Grade 1. �. 2. Size: 18" x 36". 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #700. K. Janitor's Shelves US) 1. 18 gauge stainless steel units with 8" wide shelf and drying rack full length, with ... rag hooks and spring activated mop holders. 2. Furnish units 36" long with 4 holders and 3 hooks. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #9984. L. Towel Pin (TP) 1. Die cast zinc alloy, with approximately 2-inch square base and rectangular post with 2-1/4 inch projection. _ 2. Acceptable product: Bradley: Single hook #931. M. Shower Seats (SS) 1. Vertical folding padded shower seats. 2. _ Acceptable product: Bobrick B518 left-hand or B517 right-hand. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Form surfaces flat without distortion, scratches or dents. 4. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 5. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 6. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 7. Fabricate all accessories with concealed mountings covered by finished snap -on or set screw type escutcheons or mountings concealed behind units with doors unless otherwise specified. 8. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 9. Provide manufacturer's standard keyed lock in all accessories having doors. _ 10. Provide continuous type hinge on all accessories having doors. B. Grab Bar (GB) 1. Fabricate from 1-1 /2 inch OD seamless stainless steel tubing with 1 1 /2 inch clear projection between wall and bar. 2. Provide integral mounting flange with screw mounting holes concealed on lip of flange and designed to support grab bar in compliance with specified performance requirements. -- 3. Provide one piece flange covers fabricated to fit over wall anchors and fixed by means of not less than three set screws. 4. Fabricate bends in conformance with 36 CFR Part 1191. _ 5. Stainless Steel: Either 302 or 304 L, 16 gauge (.064") minimum for 1 Y4" for 1 Y2" O.D. bars and 18 gauge (.050") minimum for 1" O.D. bars. 6. Finish: Satin finish. In addition, provide manufacturer's standard non -slip surface, either knurled or peened, over gripping surface of bars. 7. Attachment: concealed. 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX C. E. F. G. 900-9330 8. Construction: Provide one piece construction with ends returned to wall with integral intermediate supports as required. All joints shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished on exposed surfaces, finished to present uniform matching appearance throughout. 9. Anchors: Provide sub -anchors as required at each support, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of wall and finish condition. Support on drywall or plaster bases solely by means of toggle bolts is prohibited. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTDWR) 1. Fabricate as single framed unit containing upper paper towel dispenser and lower waste receptacle compartment with each concealed behind lockable door. 2. Fabricate cabinet and frame of not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel with 1 inch frame face and 1 /4 inch return to wall. 3. Fabricate doors of not less than 0.0500 inch stainless steel. Mirrors 1. Fabricate with 18 gauge stainless steel angle frame with seamless [square] [rounded] mitered corners, welded and ground smooth. 2. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel back and 18 gauge cold rolled steel hangar, all welded construction. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1 Fabricate body and lid from not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel and back from not less than 0.0250-inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate lid with integral slope to front and integral handle. 3. Fabricate with bottom service door equipped with tumbler lock. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Fabricate from not less than 0.0375-inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate with clear non -breakable plastic fill level indicator and key type fill cover. 3. Valve: All purpose liquid type, chrome plated brass valve body and stainless steel valve mechanism with integral check valve. Towel Pin (TP) 1. Fabricate post from not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel with 0.0781-inch rectangular hook welded continuously to post. 2. Fabricate with separate mounting bracket and snap -on stainless steel escutcheon with concealed set screw. Shower Seats 1. Frame: Fabricated of 1" dia. type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel tubing. Heliarc welded. 2. Wall Bracket: Fabricated of 16 gauge stainless steel with stainless steel piano hinges. 3. Retaining Bracket: Fabricated of 11 gauge stainless steel. Positive bullet -type catch holds seat securely in up or down position. 4. Seat: White reinforced vinyl fabric over 2 inch thick foam mounted on 1 /2 inch thick marine grade plywood. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123, A386 to 1.25 oz/sq. yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Install grab bars [and shower seats] in conformance with performance requirements specified. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Administration Building, Areas 'A', 'B' and 'C' 1. Women A101, Toilet to have: 1 Mirror as specified in section 08800 - GLAZING. 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 2 Towel Bars 1 Towel Pin 1 Shower Grab Bar 2. Men A110 Toilet to have: 1 Mirror as specified in section 08800 - GLAZING. 2 Toilet Tissue Dispensers 3 Towel Bars 4 Towel Pins 3. Toilet All 24 Toilet to have: 1 Mirror 18 x 36" 1 Paper Towel Dispenser 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Towel Pin 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 6 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 4. Womens' Shower B1 12 Shower to have: 3 Towel Pins 3 Shower Rods 3 Shower Curtains 1 Shower Seat 1 Shower Grab Bar 5. Womens' Toilet B113 Toilet to have: 1 Mirror as specified in section 08800 - GLAZING. 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 4 Toilet Tissue Dispensers 4 Sanitary Napkin Disposals 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 6. Mens' Shower B115 Shower to have: 1 Mirror as specified in section 08800 - GLAZING. 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 5 Towel Pins 1 Shower Seat 1 Shower Rod 1 Shower Curtain 1 Shower Grab Bar 7. Mens' Toilet B116 Toilet to have: 2 Toilet Tissue Dispensers 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 8. Breakroom 8120, Janitor C122, Breakroom D109, Evidence Storage D115 Each to have: 1 Paper Towel Dispenser, Type II 9. Mens' Toilet C114 Toilet to have: 2 Mirrors 18 x 36 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 7 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 10. Womens' Toilet C115 Toilet to have: — 2 Mirrors 18 x 36 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 3 Toilet Tissue Dispensers — 3 Sanitary Napkin Disposals 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 11. Toilets C 123, D130 and D131 Each Toilet to have: — 1 Mirror 18 x 36 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser — 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long B. Maintenance Building 1. Womens' Toilet 104 Toilet to have: 1 Mirror 18 x 36 1 Paper Towel Dispenser Type I — 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 2. Mens' Toilet 106 Toilet to have: 1 Mirror 18 x 36 1 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle — 2 Toilet Tissue Dispensers 2 Towel Pins 1 Shower Seat 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long — 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long 1 Shower Grab Bar 3. Supply Washroom 108 Toilet to have: 1 Paper Towel Dispenser Type I 4. Break/Training 105 Room to have: 1 Paper Towel Dispenser Type II END OF SECTION 03860396/98 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 8 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 10820 SHOWER DOORS • • • kZ07 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section consists of hinged aluminum framed glass shower doors and enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Literature: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, detail sectional drawings and installation instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle enclosure units following manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take field measurements, to ensure openings fit manufacturer's unit sizes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on Century Shower Door Inc., 250 Lackawanna Avenue, West Paterson, NJ 07424, (201) 785-4290, Product: "Crest". 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Frame: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6463-T5, having diffuse bright finish, clear anodized; Aluminum Association AAC32A21. B. Glass: 1. Obscure glass: Patterned safety glass, nominal 5/32 inch thick, conforming to ANSI Z97, and certified by Safety Glazing Certification. C. Hinge: Continuous aluminum piano hinge, matching frame finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Install shower and tub enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored, with doors operating freely and smoothly. B. Seal with clear silicone. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 SHOWER DOORS 10820-1 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated front projection screens. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wodd Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on equipment; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, locations, and locations of seams in viewing surfaces. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate standard procedures, and conditions requiring special attention. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed UL specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including accessory mounting hardware and accessories. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the layout and installation with location and placement of utilities and other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment and partitions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. B. Draper Shade and Screen Company, Inc. 7 03860396/98 PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Stewart Filmscreen Corporation- D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 PROJECTION SCREEN A. Manually Operated. 1. Type: Spring roller on nylon bearings, wall mounted. 2. Screen Case: 22 gage steel octagonal embossed case with flat back design and baked enamel finish. Powder coated end caps. 3. Brackets: Attached to end caps for wall mounting by means of slotted screw holes. 4. Screen: Top edge mounted on and securely anchored to metal roller system without tape. Bottom of fabric mounted in metal strip in tubular slat finished in baked enamel with plastic end caps for protection. 5. Screen Fabric: Matte white with minimum grain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface; seamless construction; mildew _ resistant, FS 191 A/5760; flame resistant, NFPA 701. 6. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders. 7. Seams: Seamless construction. _ 8. Size: 70 x 70 inches. 9. Acceptable Product: Da-Lite Model B. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify supports are correct and in required location. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated. C. Securely anchor to supporting substrate, and in manner that provides a smooth operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges. D. Test units to verify that screen operating componets are in optimum functioning condition. E. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 2 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX E SECTION 11452 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 900-9330 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions, of the agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES 1. Cooking equipment, including ranges and ovens. 2. Range hood. 3. Dishwasher. 4. Ice maker -dispenser. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 15: Plumbing connections for appliances. 2. Division 16: Electrical services and connections for appliances. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS r A. Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential appliances and are based on specific types and models indicated. Appliances by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are n minor and do not change design concept as judged by Architect. Burden of proof of i I equality is on proposer. ,., 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that cant' labels indicating energy cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission. B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. C. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that conform to the following standards of the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers: D. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's printed descriptive information describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes; cut-out requirements, required utility sizes and locations and installation procedures. 2. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. 03860396/98 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using same room designations as shown on drawings. — 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle appliances in conformance with Section 01600. —' B. Deliver appliances to Project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective packaging. C. Delay delivery of appliances until utility rough -in Is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. — 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Furnish in conformance with Section 01700. B. Submit written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified, agreeing to repair or replace units or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period as follows: — 1. Gas Range: 4-year limited warranty on surface burner elements. 2. Dishwasher: 5-year warranty on the dishwasher motor and pump and 10-year warranty on tub enclosure. — 3. Ice Maker: 2-year warranty on parts and labor. 4. Exhaust Hood: 1-year limited warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — A. Admiral Company. B. Amana Refrigeration, Inc. C. _ Caloric Corporation. D. Frigidaire Appliance Company. E. General Electric Company. F. Hotpoint. — G. Kitchen Aid, Inc. H. Magic Chef, Inc. I. Maytag Company. _ J. Modern Maid Company. K. Whirlpool Corporation. L. Scotsman M. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. — 2.2 APPLIANCES A. Provide appliances and accessories as scheduled on the drawings. B. Connection Devices: Provide all hoses, cords clamps, fittings and other incidental devices as recommended by appliance manufacturer and as required for a complete _ installation. 2.3 FINISHES A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard stainless steel or porcelain enamel finish as indicated. B. Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color — indicated, provide black fronts. 03860396198 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 2 ,.. FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1. Wherever residential appliances by more than one manufacturer are installed in the same space, provide units with color matching largest equipment item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ^, B. Built -In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. .., D. Utilities: 1. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 2. Connect all appliances to utilities as recommended by appliance manufacturer. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN 4 A. Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished and installed. C. Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units clean condition, ready for operation. nin I END OF SECTION 03860396/98 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 11815 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT F PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specimen Pass Box. B. Narcotic Lock Box. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supporting structure. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking. C. Division 15 Sections: Plumbing service to equipment. D. Division 16 Sections: Electrical service to equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on equipment; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, locations, and utility connections and locations. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. 1.6-COORDINATION - A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer listed for each piece of equipment. r B. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Automatic Retractable Air Hose Reel 1. 300 psi maximum 2. Vibration proof, self locking latch 3. Permanently lubricated bearings and swivels 4. 150 degree F maximum temperature r 03860396/98 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11815 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 5. Hose: 3/8 inch inside diameter x 50 feet synthetic rubber core and cover with a textile braid reinforcement; provide rubber hose stop. �. 6. Seals: Buna-N B. Automatic Retractable Oil Hose Reel 1. 2000 psi maximum _ 2. Vibration proof, self locking latch 3. Permanently lubricated bearings and swivels. 4. 150 degree F maximum temperature 5. Hose: %-inch x 50 feet with hose stop; S.A.E. 100 R1, 1-wire braid hose. C. Welding Screen 1. 8 foot tall x 8 foot long portable freestanding panel. 2. Screen: Amber colored reinforced PVC screen with light transmission as selected — by Architect. Matte finished reinforced PVC. Heavy duty grommets spaced to eliminate side gaps. 3. Frame: Aluminum; Alloy 6063TF(HE9) extrusion. Manufactured to BS1474. Square tube 20 mm x 1.6 mm wall thickness. 2-24 inch plat form legs. `- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. _ B. Verify service connections and supports are correct and in required location. 3.2 INSTALLATION - - A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. C. Install at locations indicated on the drawings. D. Install equipment, plumb, level and parallel with adjacent equipment and building appurtenances. E. Mount Hose Reel under frame support. " F. Hose and 72 inches above finished floor. 3.3 ADJUSTING — A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. -- 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Remove protective coverings from prefinished work. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11815 - 2 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 'I SECTION 12345 fFUME HOOD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS C A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Fume Hood. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS �( A. Division 15 - Mechanical. B. Division 16 - Electrical. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A366, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, j Commercial Quality. b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. �\ c. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self -Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.. d. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties, Rigid Plastics. e. D785, Standard Test Method for Rockwell hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. f. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. r" 2. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): a. LF 8, Performance Requirements for Laboratory Furniture. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer qualifications: a. Minimum of 10 years experience. • b. Five similar installations in past 3 years. 2. Installer qualifications: Employed by manufacturer or licensed or approved in r~ writing by manufacturer. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Installer: Individual actually performing work on site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. See Section 01300 a. Scaled drawing showing layout, controlling dimensions, elevations, etc. 1 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 — B. Product Technical Data 1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Product technical data sheets. C. Certification: Installer qualifications. D. Samples: 1. Available colors for Architect's color selection. , 2. Table top material for Architect's review and color selection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. 2. Hamilton Industries. 3. Fisher Scientific Company. 4. Duralab Equipment Corporation. B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01600. — 2.2 MATERIALS A. Casework: Metal r B. Glass: See Section 08800. C. Counter Tops: Epoxy resin, stainless steel, ASTM A480 or plastic laminate as scheduled. D. Hardware: Extruded aluminum, stainless steel or chromium -plated steel. E. Base: Rubber or vinyl. F. Sinks: Epoxy resin or stainless steel, ASTM A480 as scheduled. - 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Type Fume Hood: 1. General design: a. "Bypass' type to provide a relatively constant exhaust air volume through the hood regardless of sash position. r b. Acceptable Product: Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation H09K5448- 00. 2. Construction: a. Double wall end panels for hood superstructures, with the front of the panel at the hood opening radiused. (1) The hood interior end panels shall be flush with the entrance shape. (2) Area between the double wall ends to be closed to house the sash �— counterbalance weight and remote control valves. b. Provide air foil similar tot he sides at the bottom of hood opening. (1) Foil to be mounted with approximately 1 inch open space between the foil and the top front edge of the working surface. (2) Foil to extend back under the sash so that sash closes on top of foil, and thus does not close the approximate 1 inch opening. 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 2 F R FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 4I 900-9330 C. Provide automatic air bypass at top of sash opening. (1) Air bypass shall limit maximum air velocity through face of hood, and provide relatively constant volume of air through hood regardless of sash position when hood fans are in operation. �!! (2) Air bypass shall not be dependent on mechanical or electrical linkage, and shall be completely positive in operation. d. Furnish removable baffle with fixed open center slot and adjustable openings at top and bottom, at rear of hoods. (1) Adjustable baffle openings provided to allow flow of air through hood to be adjusted to compensate for types of gases, apparatus, or heat sources used in hoods. e. Hood exteriors to be constructed of cold -rolled steel. (1) Component parts to be screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front and fascia pieces, top fascia pieces, top fascia and air foil strips, and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. (2) Spacers or reinforcements to be welded to main parts. f. Hood interior lining: Glass reinforced cement. (1) End panels, back panel, baffle and top panels: Minimum 1 /4 inch thick, screwed together with cleats or steel angles to which the exterior cold- s f ' rolled steel parts can be mounted. (2) Screws: Stainless steel truss head screws. r.+ (3) Provide adjustment strips made of the lining material, adjustable by means of plastic knobs, at top and bottom of baffle. ` F (4) Provide duct collar in top of hood plenum chamber in back of top sloping baffle. (5) Punch hood fascia panels to receive four remote controlled service fittings at each side of hood. (6) Holes not used for specific services shall be furnished with removable rr plug buttons. (7) Furnish interior end panels with removable panel to provide access to service piping and valves. C. Hood working surface: Minimum 1-1 /4 inch thick molded epoxy resin made in form of a watertight pan. (1) Not less than 3/8 inch deep. (2) Safety ledge across front edge. r' B. Molded Resin Tops: t 1. Chemical and corrosion resistant, modified thermosetting epoxy resin. 2. 1 inch thick minimum. r 3. Flexural strength: ASTM D790, 14,500 psi minimum. 4. Compressive strength: ASTM D695, 35,000 psi minimum. 5. Hardness: Rockwell M, ASTM D785, 100 minimum. 6. Water absorption: By weight in 24 HR, ASTM D570, 0.04 percent maximum. 7. Flame test: ASTM D635, self -extinguishing. 8. Specific gravity: 1.97. 9. Tensile strength: 8500 psi minimum. r 10. Non -glare black color. k C. Leveling Devices: 1. 1 /2 inch diameter threaded leveling screw. 2. 3. Screw: Slotted. Capacity: 750 LB. 4. Bearing area: 1.22 sq. inch, minimum. D. Pulls for Drawers and Hinged Doors: 1. Extruded aluminum or cast type, chrome plated. t . 2. Screws at 4 inch OC. �' 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 E. Hinges: 1. Institutional, five -knuckle type. 2. Chrome plated or stainless steel. 3. Minimum 2-1/2 inch long. 4. Drilled for three screws each leaf; not welded to case or door. F. Door Catches: 1. Spring actuated. 2. Cadmium -plated steel with nylon roller. 3. Adjustable for controlled opening and closing action. G. Elbow Catches: 1. Spring type. 2. Cadmium -plated steel with strike of suitable design. H. Locks: 1. Heavy-duty cylinder type. ' 2. Exposed keyway nose: Satin nickel -plated, stamped with identifying numbers. 3. Keys: Brass, 3/32 inch thick, minimum. a. Provide for 500 primary key changes in five master keyed groups. b. Extra keys from manufacturer or registered locksmiths only. r_ I. Base: 1. 4 inch high. 2. Mitered inside corners and stainless steel wrapped outside comers. 3. Color as selected. ` J. Mechanical Service Fittings: 1. Manual operation type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fixture designs permitting field conversion from manual to self -closing to manual ^- type. 3. Identify services with tamperproof color coded plastic index buttons as follows: COLOR OF SERVICE COLOR CODE LETTERS Cold Water Dark Green CW White 4. Plumbing fittings: Red brass body (minimum 85 percent copper) unless otherwise indicated. K. Water Fittings: ._ 1. Gooseneck, straightway or bibb-type as indicated. a. Replaceable cartridge: (1) Non -corrosive, non-metallic housing. (2) Red brass stem and Buna-N "0' ring. (3) Ceramic discs flow control through 90 DegF rotation. (4) FDA approved lubricant. (5) Sealed to faucet body with two Buna-N 00' rings and secured with cap •- nut. b. Easy grip 4 arm value handles. C. Spout outlets: (1) 3/8 inch IPS. ` (2) Female threads. (3) Removable 3/4 inch hose connection with 10 serrations or removable anti -splash outlet. d. Goosenecks: (1) 3/8 inch brass pipe. (21 0.09 inch wall thickness. _ (3) 7-1/2 inch clearance, minimum, between outlet and top, with two 90- degree bends. r 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 4 r FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 (4) Union -type connection to faucet. 45) Field adjustment of fixed goosenecks on conversion to swinging type by removal of a washer. e. Combination hot and cold water fittings: One piece cast body. f. Special water fittings (distilled, deionized and demineralized): 111 Aluminum body, anodized inside and out. (2) Tin-plated brass stem. (3) Aluminum serrated hose connection. g. Fittings for non -critical home -type soft water (SW): Laboratory type brass. L. Piping: 1. Size to provide full capacity at fittings. 2. Water piping: Type L copper tubing. f 3. Steam piping: Black steel. 4. Other piping: Black iron. 5. Neatly cut and fitted with burrs and cuttings removed. M. Vacuum Breakers: 1. Brass. 2. Integral unless otherwise noted. 3. Separate units: Nickel. N. Molded Epoxy Resin Sinks: 1. Modified, thermosetting black epoxy resin oven cured. r 2. 14' L x 6' H x 10' W Cup sinks with threaded outlet. t i 3. Sink plug: 1-1 /2 inch lead with brass lock nut. 4. Strainer and plug assembly: Modified epoxy recessed into bottom of sink. 0. 5. Overflow: Black polyethylene, removable. Electrical Fixtures and Fittings: 1. Flush, pedestal, or line types as indicated. 2. Pedestal and line type boxes: Aluminum with stainless steel flush plates. r 3. Receptacle boxes: Plated steel. 4. Comply with Division 16 requirements. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Products indicated on Drawings are responsibility of casework manufacturer. 2. Provide components indicated. Model numbers given are those of prime ' manufacturers listed. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth. /`, 4. No exposed fasteners allowed. 5. Attach pulls through both panels of doors and drawer fronts. 6. Solid door interior panels, scribing strips, filler panels, enclosures, drawer fronts and bodies, intermediate horizontal front rails, shelves, finished back panels and sloping 7 tops: ASTM A366 steel, 20 GA minimum. 7. Case tops, ends, bottoms, backs, partitions, security panels, and door exterior panels: ASTM A366 steel, 18 GA minimum. 8. Drawer suspensions, and door hinge reinforcement: ASTM A366 steel, 14 GA minimum. B. Cases -General: 1. Welded shell, with front and rear corner posts welded to end panels. 2. Fixed or removable back and bottom. 3. Front and rear top rails, intermediate cross rails as required. 4. Integral bases. E' 5. Drawers and doors as indicated. 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX C. 14 E F. G H. 900-9330 _ 6. Accessories as indicated. 7. Completely fabricate assembly ready for placement. Base Units: 1. Removable backs, one piece, formed on all sides, retained at top by flange of top rail and secured with screws. 2. Notches for securing drawer runners and intermediate cross rails. 3. Right hand and left hand steel ADA base cabinet. 4. 30 inch high x'22 inch deep x 15 inch wide. 5. One drawer and one door per unit. Fixed Bottoms: 1. One piece, front formed into lower front rail, welded to case. . a. At drawers and swinging doors: Rabbeted. 2. Access holes directly over leveling screws with flush, snap -in buttons. Removable Bottoms: 1. One piece, front formed to fit stepinchlower front rail. a. No access holes. Bases: 1. Integral, nominal 4 inch high with 3 inch deep toe space. 2. Leveling screw at each lower corner with nut welded to die formed flange. 3. Minimum 1-1 /4 x 1-1 /4 x 4 inch high formed stainless steel outside corner covers. Drawers: 1. Modular sized, removable, mountable in any location in cabinet. 2. Fronts: Formed, nominal 3/4 inch thick, with removable outer head. a. South deadening material between panels. 3. Bodies: Bottom, sides, back and inner front, welded assembly. a. Top edge of sides formed into semi -circular tote grip. b. Bottom and back one piece. 4. Suspension: Self -centering drawers, removable without use of tools, locking in full open position. a. Drawer runner welded to drawer body. b. Case runner attached with screws or into slotted rail. c. Coved runner raceways with round nylon tired ball bearing rollers. d. Rubber closing bumpers. e. Friction centering devices not acceptable. Swinging Doors: 1. Inner and outer panels welded together. a. Over 14 inch wide and under 36 inch high: Formed, embossed stiffener. 2. Sound deadening mastic inside panels. 3. Provide hinge mounting brackets and hinge reinforcement. 4. Fit to case with minimum clearance. 5. Provide roller catch, pull, hinges, rubber bumper. Molded Epoxy Resin Tops: 1. Make joints with chemical and corrosion -resistant cement. 2. Provide drip grooves on underside of exposed edges. 3. Provide raised 1 /4 inch drip edge at exposed front and side edges. 4. Provide backsplash 4 inch high wherever top abuts wall unless indicated otherwise. Sinks: 1. Manufacturer's standard sizes where dimensions do not vary by more than 1 /2 inch from sizes Indicated. 2. Provide with strainer and tailpiece. 3. Provide supports of reagent resistant finish. a. In cabinets: Two 11 GA steel channels extending across width, attached to 3/8 inch diameter hanger rod. AZ 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 6 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 b. In table frames: 1 /4 inch thick steel with hangers screwed to cross rails. 1 /2 inch thick supports when sinks have bottom area over 250 SO IN. (. 4. Cove inside comers. 5. Slope bottom to drain. K. Finishes: ` 1. Steel components: ' - E a. Manufacturer's standard two -coat corrosion -resistant enamel backed on or electrostatically applied epoxy powder coating. Color as selected. b. Backs and surfaces not exposed to view: One coat. c. Concealed interior parts: One coat, lab black. 2. Mechanical service fixtures: Coat external parts with either a chemical-resistant baked -on coating or an acid and solvent -resistant plastic coating. i i a. Color as selected. - 3. External miscellaneous surfaces not specified elsewhere. a. Aluminum: Brushed. b. Stainless steel: Stain. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and Drawings in all cases where items or details are not indicated. C. Except for final mechanical and electrical connections, installation of each item shall be complete in every respect, including all necessary items required for proper operation and appearance. D. Where an item of equipment is furnished without a cord and plug, electrical wiring in or on equipment shall be brought to an equipment junction box located on and part of the equipment such that flexible connection no longer than 3 feet will be needed to make final connection between items and rough -in junction box. E. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for complete installation. F. Furnish and set in place all service and plumbing fixtures as indicated. G. Seal joints in tops, backsplashes, etc. with sealant as specified by casework manufacturer. I i H. Install base after placement and leveling of all base units is complete. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair all damage done to premises as a result of installation. Remove all debris left by this installation. B. Test and adjust all items of equipment for satisfactory operation. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Cover tops of installed base units. B. Remove upon acceptance of Project by Owner. t END OF SECTION 03860396/98 FUME HOOD 12345 - 7 I I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 900-9330 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wall opening head support blocking. B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Window framing and interior reveals. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal slat louver blinds installed at window openings; manual control of raising and lowering by cord for full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics and operating features. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 4 inches long illustrating slat materials, finish and color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. 03860396/98 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 900-9330 A. Metal Slats: 1 inch wide; 0.011 inch thick spring tempered pre -finished aluminum horizontal slats, radiused slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail: Pre -finished, formed steel box; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation. D. Lift Cord: Braided nylon or polypropylene; continuous loop, free end weighted. E. Tilt Control Wand: Extruded plastic; octagon shape; removable type; Manufacturer's standard length for window opening height scheduled. F. Head Support Bracket: Manufacturer's standard. G. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.2 FINISHES A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: Color as selected. B. Cord Control: Color to match general color of blind. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance of 1 /2 inch maximum. B. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1 /4 inch between assemblies, occurring at window mullion centers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners. C. Place intermediate head supports at midpoint of blinds 36 inches wide to 64 inches wide and at quarter points for blinds wider that 64 inches. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1 /8 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1 /8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 03860396/98 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 -'2 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. END OF SECTION 900-9330 03860396/98 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12512 - 3 F FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 12630 FIXED LECTURE TABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed tables for lecture halls, where multiple seating is required. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Floor substrate surface. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. B. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. C. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel D. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings. E. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold -rolled, electrolytic Zinc -Coated. F. ASTM B221 - Aluminum & Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes & Tubes. G. NEMA LD3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit drawings fully describing the table layout plan developed for Architects prints of the building. Include details of all tables, sizes, widths, anchorage and accessories. C. Product Data 1. Provide product data on table finishes and all associated products. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Samples 1. Samples for verification purposes of each exposed material from which table units and accessories are composed, in each color, finish, pattern, and texture indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All component parts of the product are to be made under direct control of the manufacturer. Utilize testing and inspection procedures to assure uniform high quality component parts and finished product. 03860396/98 FIXED LECTURE TABLES 12630 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 900-9330 A. Do not install tables until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is f complete and nominally dry, installation of finishes including painting is complete, and other units of work above the ceiling are complete. Do not install tables until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are continuously maintained at final occupancy values. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Check table layout by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction - progress to avoid a delay in the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery to the job site, properly store and protect during and after the installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fixed Lecture Table, Model 457 Table 1. American Desk Mfg. Co. 2. American Seating Co. y- 3. Hussey Seating Co. 4. Irwin Seating Co. 5. JG Furniture Systems, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gray Iron Castings: Class 25 (25,000 psi), free of bow holes and hot checks with parting lines, ground smooth. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. C. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: Commercial and drawing quality, Coating Class C, chemically treated for baked -enamel finish and not less than 0.0396 inch thick. D. Medium -Density Fiberboard: Grade MS. E. Plastic Laminate: GP 50. 2.3 FRAME A. Pedestal Table Supports: Powder coated with the following system. B. Metal Parts: All exposed cast iron and steel parts shall be cleaned and powder coated using the following procedure: 1. Cleaning in a 7-stage bonderized process a. 1" stage: 90 second acid clean with Parco 325, 130 to 160 degrees. b. 2nd stage: 60 second water rinse, 110-140 degrees F. C. V stage: 60 second iron phosphate with bonderite 1014, 110-140 degrees -- F., 40-70 Mg/F coating weight. d. 4`h stage: 30 second water rinse, ambient temperature. e. 51h stage: 30 second seal with Parcolene 95, 120 degrees F. f. 61h stage: 30 second delonized water rinse, ambient temperature. 03860396/98 FIXED LECTURE TABLES 12630 - 2 F i Vol. FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 g 7" stage: Duplex D.I. system. h. After 2 minutes, all parts pass thru a dry -off oven for 5 minutes at minutes at 300 degrees F. 2. Finishing of parts in an electrostatic system. a. All parts shall be coated with a thermosetting epoxy powder. b. All parts shall have an average dry film thickness (D.D.T.) of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. C. Parts shall be baked in a gas fired convection oven at a minimum of 350 degrees for at least 20 minutes. d. Cured powder coat must pass the H pencil hardness test. C. Table Top 1. 1-1 /4" thick and 18" wide consisting of a medium density board core to which a high pressure laminate has been bonded with appropriate backing sheets for a balanced construction. 2. Edges: Banded with vinyl molding. 3. Flush connectors: Used to join adjacent tables. D. Modesty Panels: Continuous 9/16" thick medium density core with high pressure laminate, 9-3/4" high. Secure with steel brackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces and site conditions under provisions of Section 01039, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for construction tolerances, material properties as the affect anchors and fasteners, and location of junction boxes. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Call all deviation of site conditions to approved shop drawings to the attention of the Architect. B. Install product in a secure manner, level and parallel to risers. C. Installation in accordance with approved shop drawings. D. Complete installation as called for, and detailed on the drawings, in strict accordance with drawings and manufacturer's standard specification, instructions and recommendations. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1 /16 inch between joints. END OF SECTION 03860396/98 FIXED LECTURE TABLES 12630 - 3 4 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 F SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Formwork for pavements. B. Formwork accessories. C. Form stripping. D. Reinforcing steel for pavements. E. Cast -in -place concrete for pavements. F. Concrete curing. G. Striping. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Earthwork: Elsewhere in Division 2. B. C. Cast -in -place concrete for structures: Division 3. Joint Division 7. { sealers: 1.4 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 182-911 -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991. r B. ACI 201.211-92 -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. 17 C. ACI 211.1-91 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. D. ACI 301-89 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. E. ACI 302.1 R-89 -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute; 1989. F. ACI 304R-89 -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. G. ACI 305R-91 -- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991. H. I. ACI 306R-88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. ASTM A 185-90a -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1990. J. ASTM A 615-92 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for r, Concrete Reinforcement; 1992. t ; K. ASTM C 31-91 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1991. r" L. ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992. G M. ASTM C 39-93a-- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1993. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-1 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 N. ASTM C 42-90 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1990. 0. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992. P. ASTM C 143-90a -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990. Q. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994. R. ASTM C 171-92 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992. S. ASTM C 172-90 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990. T. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1978. U. ASTM C 231-91b -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1991. V. ASTM C 260-94 -- Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994. W. ASTM C 309-93 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1993. X. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. Y. ASTM C 618-94a -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994. Z. ASTM D 1751-83(91) -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983 (Reapproved 1991). AA. ASTM E 329-93b -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993. BB. CRSI MSP-1-90 -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Concrete admixtures. 2. Curing compound. B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix -designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr). C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride content complies with specified requirements. 5. Delivery tickets: Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each load of concrete delivered to site. 6. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 7. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-2 r- i LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 t! 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Services: 1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to Hawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A._ Pavement Forms: Standard steel paving forms in sections not less than 10 feet in length. 1. Single piece; depth equal to slab thickness. 2. Base width at least three -fourths of form depth but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise approved. 3. Straightness tolerance: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet from true plane surface along top; 1 /4 inch in 10 feet along face. 4. Locking provisions at ends of abutting form sections. 5. Wood forms complying with the above provisions, including base and locking, may be used only where form of less than 10 feet is required. 6. Wet screeds will not be permitted. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-3 l LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain. C. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1 /2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. D. Load Transfer Devices: 1. Dowels: Plain round or deformed bars, as shown on the drawings. Provide corrosion inhibitor on unbonded end. a. Metal expansion caps: Designed to provide not less than 1 inch of bar movement. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required. 2. Type 1. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F. C. Water: Potable. D. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 2M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: One-third of depth of pavements. E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplesticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. K. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenef cloth. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting. C. Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Curing compounds: Liquid membrane -forming curing compounds complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1. 2. Solvents: Provide water -based products. D. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-4 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 900-9330 A. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 211, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. B. Specified compressive strength f'(c) at 28 days: 3,500 psi. C. Fly Ash: 1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20 D. Admixtures: 1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. r►. 4 2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4, Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be r placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 1 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. E. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may �. submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-5 7 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal B. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by concrete documents, properly located and accurately aligned. Provide for screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. C. Release Agent: Provide field -applied form coating. Thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. General: Provide joints of the types and in the locations shown on the drawings. 1. Construct joints in adjacent panels in precise alignment. Do not offset joints. 2. Tool slab edges and formed joints with 1/8-inch radius jointing tool. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide positive, firm support of filler during placement of concrete to ensure accurate _ alignment. 2. Install expansion joint filler to the full concrete depth. 3. Recess top edge of filler to the depth indicated to accommodate joint sealant. Protect top edge of filler with removable metal channel while concrete is being placed, or provide filler with removable portion of the required depth. 4. Where dowels are used, punch or drill filler to exact dowel diameter, spacing, and depth. C. Load Transfer Devices: 1. Apply a thin brush coat of approved lubricant to free end of dowels immediately before concrete placement. 2. Place at right angles to joints, in precise horizontal and vertical alignment and spacing, and firmly supported against movement during placing of concrete. D. Sawn Contraction Joints: 1. Use only wet saws of an approved type. - - 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-6 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 2. Time sawing to occur before cracking occurs but after concrete has hardened sufficiently to avoid rough joint surfaces. 3. Saw to .one-fourth of slab depth. 4. Extend saw cut to full width of concrete section, including adjacent curbs and gutters, if any. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide keyed construction joints with tie bars of size and spacing as approved by the architect. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to architect. E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. F. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. 1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.5 FINISHING PAVEMENTS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1 R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or derby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. r 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-7 t LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. B. Float Finish: As specified above. C. Slab Surface Tolerances: i 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 2. Flatness tolerance: Maximum depression between high spots when measured by placing a 10-foot straightedge on surface at any orientation: 1 /4 inch. D. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect. 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION ti A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water -saturated sand. C. Water -fog spray. d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints. . 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete 1 has dried. a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. 1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. 2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application _ at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. D. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. E. Ensure that joints and slab edges receive adequate curing. -- 1. Ensure that sawn joints receive adequate curing after sawing. 2. Where joints subsequently will be sealed, do not apply curing compounds unless joint faces will be sandblasted free of compound. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-8 r LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. 3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 8 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 3.8 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15 mil wet film thickness. 3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test performed on air -entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made, E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: 1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 3. When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) 4. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-9 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: 1. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f'ic). 3. Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength Vic). g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. - F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. C. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the M sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. 3.10 OPENING PAVEMENTS TO TRAFFIC A. Do not allow traffic, including construction traffic, on pavements until authorized. B. Pavements may be opened to traffic only after seven 171 days have elapsed after placement and pavements have developed at least 85 percent of specified final design strength. END OF SECTION 02520 03860396/98 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-10 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX SECTION 02521 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9330 A. Drawings, General Conditiions of the Agreement and Division 1—General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Curb and gutter, concrete valley gutters, concrete fillets, concrete driveways, sidewalks, drainage aprons, and miscellaneous concrete paving work. 1.3 EXCAVATION AND GRADING A. Excavation or embankment for curb, gutter, combined curb and gutter, and other miscellaneous concrete work shall conform to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as established in the field. The preparation of the curb and gutter subgrade shall be completed at the time the subgrade is constructed for the adjacent street section. The street subgrade shall be extended six (6) inches beyond the back of curb and shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. Where the finished street subgrade is more than three (3) inches below the bottom of the proposed curb grade, compacted caliche base shall be used as fill to bring the subgrade up to the required bottom of curb elevation. Where curb, gutter and combined curb and gutter pavement is on fill, the material shall be placed in layers and compacted, by appropriate methods, equal to that specified in the Earthwork section. The cost of excavation, embankment, grading for curb, gutter, combined curb and gutter and other concrete structures or concrete work shall be included as a part of and paid - for in the cost of each item bid. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. General: Forms for curb and gutter shall be approved type metal forms. The form sections shall be straight, free of warp and of a depth equal to the depth of the concrete section formed. The forms shall consist of a back form and gutter form with steel templates. Forms shall be constructed accurately to line and grade as established in the field, shall be adequately braced so that they will not move during placing of the concrete, and shall remain in place at least twelve 0 2) hours after placing of concrete. Forms shall be oiled with a light oil before each use and forms which are to be reused shall be cleaned immediately after use and maintained in good condition. Forms for concrete paving shall also conform to provisions of this paragraph. Forms for curb and gutter on curves with a radius of 130 feet or less shall be flexible steel forms. B. Templates: The steel templates shall have the shape of the cross-section of the curb and gutter except the bottom portion of the template shall be cut away to allow for a solid mass of concrete. An acceptable shape is shown on a detail sheet of the plans; however, other shapes may be used upon submission of a design and the approval of the Engineer. /� 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Machine Laid Curb and Gutter , 1. The concrete curb and gutter sections may be formed with a curb and gutter laydown machine, provided the machine is capable of laying the curb and gutter to the proper grade, alignment and cross-section, and is equipped with adequate vibrators to produce a dense concrete free of honeycombs. 2. Laydown machines that cannot meet the above requirements will not be acceptable for use. D. Curb and Gutter Cross -Section Should the Contractor desire to use metal templates which differ slightly from the sections shown on the plans, such templates or drawings thereof shall be submitted for approval. Slight differences which will not affect the general appearances of the curb and gutter sections will be approved but no forms or templates shall be used which have not been approved by the Engineer. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. B Cement 1. Portland cement for the curbs and gutters, and various other concrete work shall conform to the Standard Specification for Portland Cement, A.S.T.M. Designation C-150, Type 1. High Early Strength Cement which maybe used upon specific approval by the Engineer, shall conform to provisions of A.S.T.M. Designation C-150, Type III. Plant tests and certificates of conformity with the specifications shall be furnished with each carload of cement. 2. Cement delivered in bags shall be marked plainly with the brand name of the manufacturer and a bag shall contain ninety-four (94) pounds of cement. Cement from different mills, though tested and approved, shall not be mixed. Cement shall be stored and handled in manner which will protect it from dampness and any cement which has become partially set or which contains hard lumps or cakes shall not be used. Fine Aggregate 1. Fine aggregate shall be natural sand or mixture of such sands and shall consist of clean, hard, durable uncoated grains, free from lumps. Deleterious substances shall not exceed the following percentages by weight 2. 3. 4. Material removed by decantation .......... 3.0% Clay Lumps ........................ 0.5% Other deleterious substances such as coal, shale coated grains and soft flaky particles......................... 3.0% The aggregate shall be free from a harmful amount of salt or alkali and, when subjected to the color test for organic impurities shall not have a color darker than Fig. No. 2 (Test in accordance with A.S.T.M. Designation C-40). Material which contains frozen lumps or wood, hay, burlap, paper, dirt or other foreign matter mixed with the aggregate in stock piles or in handling shall not be used Fine aggregate shall be well graded from fine to coarse and shall meet the following requirements (ASTM C-33): Passing 3/8" Sieve ............... 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve ............ 95 - 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve ............ 80 - 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve ........... 50 - 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve ......... 25 - 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve ........... 10 - 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve ........... 2- 10% i 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 -2 �` FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 C. Coarse Aggregate 1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, or crushed gravel, or any combination of them, and shall be composed of hard, tough and durable particles free from adherent coating. It shall contain no salt, alkali, vegetable matter nor soft, friable, thin or elongated particles and the substances listed below shall not be present in excess of the amounts indicated: Soft Fragments ............ 5% by weight Clay Lumps ........... 0.25% by weight Removed by decantation ... " 1 % by weight ("17 percent if consisting essentially of crusher dust) The total deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by weight 2. Grading of coarse aggregate shall conform to the following requirements (ASTM C-33 Size No. 57): Maximum size - 17-inch sieve Passing 1-inch sieve .......... 95 - 100% Passing 1/2-inch sieve ......... 25 - 60% Passing No. 4 sieve ............ 0 - 10% 3. The coarse aggregate shall not show evidence of disintegration, nor show a total loss greater than eighteen (18) percent when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulphate accelerated soundness test using AASHTO Designation T-104. 4. The percentage of wear shall not be more than 45 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO Designation T-96. D. Water 1. The water used in mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter- The Contractor will provide at his expense the transportation of the water from the City mains to the places where it is to be used. E. Tests 1. Test certificates for cement shall be furnished as specified in paragraph 4-1 above. The Contractor shall furnish results of tests made by a competent commercial laboratory on each material source he proposes to use before start of construction and material shall not be shipped until such results have been examined by the Engineer and the source of material approved. Laboratory mix designs and conformation cylinders will not be required for this project. However, the proposed mix for each class of concrete shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to placing any concrete. The cost of all pre -construction tests shall be borne by the Contractor. Additional test certificates shall be furnished on the aggregate if the material source is changed. F. Reinforcing 1. General: Metal reinforcements shall conform to the requirements of the following: 2. Bar Reinforcement a. "Standard Specifications for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM Designation A615, Grade 60. All bars shall be deformed bars unless otherwise noted. Plain bars shall conform to requirements of ASTM Designation A306, Grade 60. b. All reinforcement shall be permanently marked with grade identification marks or shall, on delivery, be accompanied by a manufacturer's guarantee of grade and compliance with these specifications. Reinforcement stored on the site shall be P4* �i /^ 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 3 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 protected for accumulations of grease mud or other foreign matter and from rust producing conditions. Bars shall be free from rust, scale, oil, mud or structural defects when incorporated in the structures. 3. Mesh Reinforcement: Mesh reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A 185. The spacing and wire gauge shall be shown on the plans. 4. Fiber Reinforcing: Fiber reinforcing may be used in lieu of wire mesh for pedestrian sidewalks. When fiver reinforcing is used, it shall be ?Fiber Mesh? or Caprolan RC? or approved equal. The material and rate of application shall be approved by the Engineer. 5. Fabrication and Placing: Reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions and shapes shown on the plans in accordance with ACI Manual of Standard Practice unless variations are specifically shown on the plans. Four (4) sets of Fabrication shop drawings shall be furnished the Engineer and shall receive his approval before any reinforcing steel is fabricated. Bars shall be rigidly held in place with approved metal devices in accordance with the ACI Detailing Manual. Cover for bars shall be 1 ? inches of concrete in slabs unless otherwise noted on the plans. Where details on splices are not shown or where unanticipated splices are required, they shall be made in a region of minimum stress and the length of lap shall be as required by the ACI Code. 2.3 PROPORTIONING A. The exact amounts of all material entering into the concrete shall be determined in the field in order to produce the desired durability, density, uniformity, workability and the specified strength. All materials shall be measured separately by methods, satisfactory to the Engineer, which will permit control of the concrete and production of a product of uniform quality. Particular care shall be used in measuring cement and water. One bag of cement will be considered as ninety-four (94) pounds and one gallon of water as eight and thirty-three one -hundredths (8.33) pounds. Water contained in the aggregates shall be taken into account in calculating the amount of water to be added to the mixture. The percentage of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall be between 33% and 45%. B. Concrete for the designated uses shall conform to the following: Max. Water Content Min. Cement Content Compressive U.S. Gallons 94-lb. Sacks Strength, Lbs. Per Sack of Cement Per Cu. Yd. Per Sa. In Curb and Gutter, Gutter, Concrete Valley Gutters and Misc. Concrete Work 6.5 5.0 3000 at 28 days 2.4 MIXING AND PLACING A. Concrete shall be mixed in an approved batch type mixer which shall be equipped with a device for measuring the water which is accurate to within two percent (2%). Minimum time for mixing each batch after all ingredients are in the mixer shall be one and one-half (1 ?) minutes. The speed of the mixer shall not exceed that recommended by the manufacturer. Excessive overmixing, requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency, will not be permitted. Concrete not in place within 45 minutes from the time of charging the drum, or which has developed initial hardening, shall not be used. Transit mixed concrete conforming to these specifications will be acceptable. 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 -4 eo Om FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX PART 3 GENERAL 3.1 PLACING 900-9330 A. Concrete shall be deposited in place in such a manner as to require the minimum of rehandling and shall be placed in a manner which will produce a uniformly dense section, free of honeycomb or other voids, conforming to the grade, thickness, and shapes shown on the plans. Before placing concrete the subgrade or base surface shall be sprinkled so that it is in a thoroughly moistened condition (but not muddy). Concrete adjacent to forms or joints shall be thoroughly spaded or vibrated in order to eliminate honeycomb. Honeycombed places in the back of the curb or face of gutter will not be permitted, all honeycombed places shall be patched as directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature is less than 407F. and under no circumstances shall it be placed on frozen ground. B. Mixing concrete for use in a curb and gutter laydown machine shall be mixed as specified above, and shall be placed to form the curb and gutter section with the laydown machine. Slump of the concrete shall be accurately controlled and shall be low enough to prevent sagging or slumping of the curb section behind the machine. Batches with excessive slump will be rejected. 3.2 JOINTS A. Curb and gutter shall be constructed with an expansion joint at the tangent point of each return at intersections, at intervals of not more than forty feet (401 between intersections (odd length sections as directed by the Engineer), and at the end of each day's concrete pour. A construction or contraction joint shall be located at 10-foot intervals, or at each template or as directed by the Engineer. All joints shall be perpendicular to the surface of the concrete and to the axis of the section. Construction or contraction joints for curb and gutter poured in metal forms shall be formed by metal template plates accurately shaped to the cross-section shown on the plans and so constructed that they can be removed during the finishing operations. Templates shall be maintained in good condition and warped or bent templates shall not be used B. In machine laid curb and gutter the contraction joints shall be. made at 10-foot intervals by cutting into the curb and gutter sections with a trowel a depth of approximately 27"; these joints shall be finished as specified under finishing. Expansion joints shall be placed at end returns, but not to exceed a maximum spacing of three hundred feet (3001, and at the end of each day's concrete pour. C. Expansion joint material shall be an approved preformed bituminous impregnated non -extruding type jointing material, 7" thick (3/4" thick for machine laid curb and gutter), and shaped to the section of the curb and gutter, or concrete drainage apron. 3.3 FINISHING A. Curb and gutter, gutter, concrete valley gutters, fillets, and other miscellaneous concrete work shall be accurately shaped to the cross section shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer and finished to a surface of uniform texture by floating with a wood float and trowelling. The final finishing shall be done with a brush, the last stroke being one from the back of the curb to the lip of the gutter. Both sides of all joints, the lip of the gutter, and back edge of the curb shall be finished with an approved edging tool before the final brushing. Curves at the top and bottom of curb sections shall be accurately shaped and finished and the finished curb and gutter shall present a uniform appearance without "waves" in the face of the curb or "pockets" in the gutters or slabs. Particular care shall be exercised at valley gutters, both in setting forms and finishing, to insure that the shape of the gutter shall conform to the details of the plans and that no water pockets will be formed in the gutter of the pavement. �,� 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 5 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 At construction and contraction joints the mortar shall be cut the full width of the joint, and shall be neatly finished with an approved edging or grooving tool of such design to groove the joint approximately 2" in depth. B. The construction and contraction joints in machine laid curb and gutter shall be neatly formed and finished with an approved edging or grooving tool of such design to groove the joint approximately 2" in depth. 3.4 PROTECTING AND CURING A. All concrete work shall be covered with burlap or other suitable material as soon as it has set sufficiently to prevent marking and kept wet continuously for at least four (4) days. Care shall be taken to prevent mechanical injury to concrete work during this period and until the work is accepted. Any work damaged prior to acceptance shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. In lieu of the above method of curing, the curb and gutter may be cured by applying a liquid membrane coating to all exposed surfaces as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently. The back and front of the concrete curb and gutter shall have the membrane applied as soon as the forms have been removed. The materials and method of application shall be approved by the Engineer before concrete placement begins. The coating shall conform to A.S.T.M. Designation C-309. C. Suitable means shall be provided to prevent concrete from freezing for not less than 72 hours - after placing. Any concrete damaged by freezing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. The addition of any admixture of chemicals to the concrete to "- prevent freezing shall not be allowed, unless specifically approved by the Engineer. D. Suitable means shall be provided to protect freshly poured concrete from rain damage. Such means shall be kept readily accessible at all times during placement of concrete. 3.5 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS A. The removal of all curbs, gutters, sidewalks and driveways that are required for the construction of the improvements as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor and no separate payment will be made for this item of work. B. Sidewalks, driveways, curb and gutter shall be removed to the limits as directed by the Engineer, and shall be sawed with a concrete saw unless the concrete is being removed to an existing construction. joint. 3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Any defective work disclosed after the forms have been removed shall be immediately removed and replaced. If any dimensions are deficient, or if any section is not constructed to the proper grade, or if the surface of the concrete is bulged, uneven, or shows honeycomb, which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be repaired satisfactorily, the entire section shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 3.7 BACKFILLING A. Backfill behind and adjacent to all concrete work including curb, gutter, sidewalks, drives, drainage structures and other miscellaneous concrete work shall be made from good quality topsoil. This material shall be free from organic material such as leaves, grass, roots and other unsuitable materials and free of rocks or stones. The Contractor shall provide a smooth, even slope between the property line and the top of curb or other concrete structure. Backfill behind the curb and gutter shall be compacted to at least the density of the undisturbed natural ground in the adjacent area. 03860396/98 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 6 -' FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 B. Care shall be taken during the backfill and cleanup process not to scrape, chip, crack or otherwise damage the concrete including tire marks from equipment or trucks. Any damaged concrete will be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION �;, 03860396198 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 7 i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 SECTION 02665 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Excavation and backfill for water piping, valves, and fittings. B. Water piping, valves, and fittings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete requirements. B. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Backf ill requirements. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. There will be no classification of excavated materials and term excavation includes all materials encountered in excavating trenches or structural excavations. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements 1. New Lines a. Where a new potable waterline crosses an existing, non -pressure rated wastewater line, center one segment of waterline pipe over wastewater line such that joints ofwaterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from center line of wastewater line and potable waterline is at least two feet above wastewater line. b. When ever possible, center crossing between joints of wastewater line. If existing wastewater line is disturbed or shows signs of leaking, replace for at least 9 feet in both directions (18 feet total) with 150 psi pressure rated pipe. 2. New and Existing Lines a. Where a new potable waterline parallels an existing, non -pressure or pressure rated wastewater line/force main and registered professional engineer is able to determine that existing line is not leaking, locate new potable waterline at least two feet above existing line, measured vertically, and at least four feet away, measured horizontally from existing line. b. Exert every effort not to disturb bedding and backfill of existing wastewater line. B. Performance Requirements 1. In general use flanged fittings on all exposed piping and mechanical joint or push on joint on all or fittings unless orwise specified or shown on drawings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' descriptive data for all pipe, valves and fittings including all pipe thickness class calculations. ra 03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 1 F FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide PVC pipe approved by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use in transportation of potable water and bearing NSF seal of approval. B. Cast all ductile iron fittings from same quality of metal used in casting ductile iron pipe and test to same requirements. Mark and weigh as required for ductile iron pipe. ` C. Make all joints using materials and methods as required to produce joints that will function satisfactorily under various conditions encountered. D. Design all valves for a working pressure of at least 150 psi unless orwise noted. E. Tapping Sleeves 1. Mechanical joint, or as required to make connection, designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. F. When new potable water distribution lines are constructed, install no closer than nine feet in all directions to wastewater collection facilities. Measure all separation distances from outside surface of each of respected pieces. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In loading and unloading, lift pipe by hoists or slide or roll on skidways in such a manner as to avoid shock or damage. B. Do not drop piping. C. Do not skid or roll pipe handled on skidways against pipe already on ground. D. Store pipe, fittings and accessories on site in such a manner as to be kept as free as possible from dirt, sand, mud and or foreign matter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. PVC Pipe: AWWA C-900, Class 150 (DR 18), rubber gasketed, push on joint type (Bell- Tite or approved equal), B. Pipe Fittings 1. General: Type and design especially suitable for use with type of piping with which they are installed. 2. Pressure Rating: Equal to that of pipe with which they are used but in no case less than 150 psi. 3. Type: Ductile iron, mechanical joint or push -on joint unless orwise specified or shown on drawings. 4. Flanged Fittings a. Faced and drilled in accordance with standard drilling for ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges rated for at least 250 psi working pressure. b. Bolts: Length and diameter required by ANSI Specification, of best quality mild steel and provided with hexagonal heads. 5. Bolts and Nuts: Standard hexagonal heads. 6. Rubber Ring Gaskets: Suitable 1 /8" thick for all flanged joints. a. Flanges: Same material as fitting. 7. Ductile Iron Fittings a. Conformance: AWWA C110. b. Exterior Coating: Bituminous type unless orwise indicated. C. Lining: Cement -lined in accordance with specifications for coating and lining pipe. 8. Gasket Rings: Made of best quality rubber composition sheet packing one -eighth (1 /8) inch thick, of a brand and quality approved by Engineer. 03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 2 L FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 9. Where bell or mechanical joint fittings are used, cast bells integrally with fitting. Screwed -on bells will not be acceptable. 10. Joint Restraints: EBAA pipe for all mechanical joint or push -on fittings. C. Pipe Joints 1. Push -on Joints: As specified in AWWA Standard C 111. r 2. Mechanical Joints: As specified in AWWA Standard C111. 3. Miscellaneous Joints: As specified in or paragraphs or as recommended by manufacturer. D. Valves 1. General a. Valves 10-Inch And Smaller: Gate valves unless orwise specified or noted on drawings. 2. Gate Valves a. Type: Resilient seat, iron body, bronze mounted throughout and meeting all requirements of AWWA C 509, with O-ring stem packing, with same type of joint used in piping. b. Operation: Left turn opening unless orwise specified, with non -rising stem when buried and outside screw and yoke when exposed. Furnish with a two-inch operating nut when valves are buried with hand wheels when exposed. 3. Cast Iron Valve Boxes a. Design boxes to fit over a section of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe which will be used as an extension from top of valve to within 8-inches of ground surface. b. Cover: Heavy cast iron, marked "WATER". C. Base: Flanged type, with base being approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than outside diameter of barrel of box. Consider necessary length of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe required for extension as a part of box. E. Flexible Couplings and Flanged Coupling Adapters 1. Epoxy coated steel construction on couplings larger than 12-inch, and cast iron construction for smaller couplings. F. Tapping Sleeves 1. Provide fully confined gaskets at each end of sleeve to insure a positive water seal. 2. Acceptable Product: Mueller H-615, H-616 or H-619, ductile or cast iron, or approved equal. G. Polyethylene Wrap: ASTM D1248, 8 mil thickness. H. Backfill Material 1. Free from cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic material, boulders, rocks or stones, or or unsuitable material. 2. Use of material containing stones up to 2-inches in greatest dimension permitted from 1 foot above top of pipe to existing ground. 3. Use selected materials from trench excavations for backfilling except where special bedding material is required. I. Tape: Detectable from top of finished grade with a metal detector above non-metallic (PVC) pipe material. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 INSPECTION h A. Inspect pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories for damage upon delivery and during progress of work. B. Remove defective material from site. C. Clean all valves and hydrants of all dirt and foreign matter and check operation before installation. 03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 3 1 j FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 . 3.2 PREPARATION A. Sufficiently in advance of trenching operations, locate all existing underground lines wher or not shown on drawings, to prevent any damage. B. Notify operators of all oil or gas pipelines prior to excavation around such lines so that operators may be present during excavation. -' C. Exercise extreme to prevent damage to se lines. D. Thoroughly wrap all buried valves and fittings prior to installation with polyethylene tape. Secure wrap with 2" duct tape. 3.3 CLEANING A. Inspect pipe for defects before lowering into trench. B. While suspended, lightly hammer pipe to detect cracks. C. Remove defective, damaged or unsound pipe and materials from site. D. Before pipe is lowered into trench, remove all foreign matter or dirt from inside of pipe and from all bells, spigots or parts of pipe used in forming joint. E. Keep all parts of pipe, bells, spigots and fittings clean by approved means during and after laying. 3.4 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING A. Blasting for excavation of solid rock will not be permitted. B. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except in places where operation of same would cause damages to pipelines, fences or or existing structures eir above or below ground; in such instances employ hand methods. C. Maintain trenching equipment on a level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls. D. Trench Depth: Excavate trench to dines and grades as established by Engineer and as shown on drawings to provide a minimum depth of cover for all pipe of thirty-six (36) inches unless orwise specifically shown on drawings. E. Trench Width: Excavate trench to a minimum width of outside diameter of pipe plus twelve (12) inches and a maximum width of outside diameter of pipe plus eighteen (18) inches. F. Excavate trench to an even grade so that bottom of pipe will rest on bottom of trench over entire length of pipe. G. Fine grade trench by hand to obtain a true even grade. H. Fill all parts of trench excavated below grade with approved material and compact thoroughly. I. Remove ledge rock, rock fragments or or unyielding material encountered in bottom of trench to a depth of six inches below grade and refill with selected material, and thoroughly -� compact. J. Excavate bell holes of ample dimensions at each joint to prevent bell of pipe from resting on undisturbed materials and to permit proper jointing of pipe. K. Adequately support trench to protect both workmen and public and wherever necessary to prevent caving. L. Pile all excavated material in a manner that will not endanger work nor existing structures. M. Remove excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, and dispose of off site. N. Poperly support all new and existing lines to prevent settlement or damage to line both during and after construction. O. Repair existing lines damaged during excavation. r 03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 4